Antibacterial compounds

ABSTRACT

The present invention relates to the following compoundswherein the integers are as defined in the description, and where the compounds may be useful as medicaments, for instance for use in the treatment of tuberculosis.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a Continuation of application Ser. No. 16/848,337filed on Apr. 14, 2020, which is a Continuation of application Ser. No.16/460,334 filed on Jul. 2, 2019, now abandoned, which is a Division ofapplication Ser. No. 15/736,375, filed on Dec. 14, 2017, now U.S. Pat.No. 10,364,232, which is the national stage of PCT Application No.PCT/EP2016/065499 filed on Jul. 1, 2016, which claims priority fromEuropean Patent Application No. 16174718.3 file on Jun. 16, 2016,European Patent Application No. 16174713.4 filed on Jun. 16, 2016, andEuropean Patent Application No. 15174936.3 filed on Jul. 2, 2015, theentire disclosures of which are hereby incorporated in their entirety.

The present invention relates to novel compounds. The invention alsorelates to such compounds for use as a pharmaceutical and further forthe use in the treatment of bacterial diseases, including diseasescaused by pathogenic mycobacteria such as Mycobacterium tuberculosis.Such compounds may work by interfering with ATP synthase in M.tuberculosis, with the inhibition of cytochrome bc₁ activity as theprimary mode of action. Hence, primarily, such compounds areantitubercular agents.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Mycobacterium tuberculosis is the causative agent of tuberculosis (TB),a serious and potentially fatal infection with a world-widedistribution. Estimates from the World Health Organization indicate thatmore than 8 million people contract TB each year, and 2 million peopledie from tuberculosis yearly. In the last decade, TB cases have grown20% worldwide with the highest burden in the most impoverishedcommunities. If these trends continue, TB incidence will increase by 41%in the next twenty years. Fifty years since the introduction of aneffective chemotherapy, TB remains after AIDS, the leading infectiouscause of adult mortality in the world. Complicating the TB epidemic isthe rising tide of multi-drug-resistant strains, and the deadlysymbiosis with HIV. People who are HIV-positive and infected with TB are30 times more likely to develop active TB than people who areHIV-negative and TB is responsible for the death of one out of everythree people with HIV/AIDS worldwide.

Existing approaches to treatment of tuberculosis all involve thecombination of multiple agents. For example, the regimen recommended bythe U.S. Public Health Service is a combination of isoniazid, rifampicinand pyrazinamide for two months, followed by isoniazid and rifampicinalone for a further four months. These drugs are continued for a furtherseven months in patients infected with HIV. For patients infected withmulti-drug resistant strains of M. tuberculosis, agents such asethambutol, streptomycin, kanamycin, amikacin, capreomycin, ethionamide,cycloserine, ciprofoxacin and ofloxacin are added to the combinationtherapies. There exists no single agent that is effective in theclinical treatment of tuberculosis, nor any combination of agents thatoffers the possibility of therapy of less than six months' duration.

There is a high medical need for new drugs that improve currenttreatment by enabling regimens that facilitate patient and providercompliance. Shorter regimens and those that require less supervision arethe best way to achieve this. Most of the benefit from treatment comesin the first 2 months, during the intensive, or bactericidal, phase whenfour drugs are given together; the bacterial burden is greatly reduced,and patients become noninfectious. The 4- to 6-month continuation, orsterilizing, phase is required to eliminate persisting bacilli and tominimize the risk of relapse. A potent sterilizing drug that shortenstreatment to 2 months or less would be extremely beneficial. Drugs thatfacilitate compliance by requiring less intensive supervision also areneeded. Obviously, a compound that reduces both the total length oftreatment and the frequency of drug administration would provide thegreatest benefit.

Complicating the TB epidemic is the increasing incidence ofmulti-drug-resistant strains or MDR-TB. Up to four percent of all casesworldwide are considered MDR-TB—those resistant to the most effectivedrugs of the four-drug standard, isoniazid and rifampin. MDR-TB islethal when untreated and cannot be adequately treated through thestandard therapy, so treatment requires up to 2 years of “second-line”drugs. These drugs are often toxic, expensive and marginally effective.In the absence of an effective therapy, infectious MDR-TB patientscontinue to spread the disease, producing new infections with MDR-TBstrains. There is a high medical need for a new drug with a newmechanism of action, which is likely to demonstrate activity againstdrug resistant, in particular MDR strains.

The term “drug resistant” as used hereinbefore or hereinafter is a termwell understood by the person skilled in microbiology. A drug resistantMycobacterium is a Mycobacterium which is no longer susceptible to atleast one previously effective drug; which has developed the ability towithstand antibiotic attack by at least one previously effective drug. Adrug resistant strain may relay that ability to withstand to itsprogeny. Said resistance may be due to random genetic mutations in thebacterial cell that alters its sensitivity to a single drug or todifferent drugs.

MDR tuberculosis is a specific form of drug resistant tuberculosis dueto a bacterium resistant to at least isoniazid and rifampicin (with orwithout resistance to other drugs), which are at present the two mostpowerful anti-TB drugs. Thus, whenever used hereinbefore or hereinafter“drug resistant” includes multi drug resistant.

Another factor in the control of the TB epidemic is the problem oflatent TB. In spite of decades of tuberculosis (TB) control programs,about 2 billion people are infected by M. tuberculosis, thoughasymptomatically. About 10% of these individuals are at risk ofdeveloping active TB during their lifespan. The global epidemic of TB isfuelled by infection of HIV patients with TB and rise of multi-drugresistant TB strains (MDR-TB). The reactivation of latent TB is a highrisk factor for disease development and accounts for 32% deaths in HIVinfected individuals. To control TB epidemic, the need is to discovernew drugs that can kill dormant or latent bacilli. The dormant TB canget reactivated to cause disease by several factors like suppression ofhost immunity by use of immunosuppressive agents like antibodies againsttumor necrosis factor α or interferon-γ. In case of HIV positivepatients the only prophylactic treatment available for latent TB istwo-three months regimens of rifampicin, pyrazinamide. The efficacy ofthe treatment regime is still not clear and furthermore the length ofthe treatments is an important constrain in resource-limitedenvironments. Hence there is a drastic need to identify new drugs, whichcan act as chemoprophylatic agents for individuals harboring latent TBbacilli.

The tubercle bacilli enter healthy individuals by inhalation; they arephagocytosed by the alveolar macrophages of the lungs. This leads topotent immune response and formation of granulomas, which consist ofmacrophages infected with M. tuberculosis surrounded by T cells. After aperiod of 6-8 weeks the host immune response cause death of infectedcells by necrosis and accumulation of caseous material with certainextracellular bacilli, surrounded by macrophages, epitheloid cells andlayers of lymphoid tissue at the periphery. In case of healthyindividuals, most of the mycobacteria are killed in these environmentsbut a small proportion of bacilli still survive and are thought to existin a non-replicating, hypometabolic state and are tolerant to killing byanti-TB drugs like isoniazid. These bacilli can remain in the alteredphysiological environments even for individual's lifetime withoutshowing any clinical symptoms of disease. However, in 10% of the casesthese latent bacilli may reactivate to cause disease. One of thehypothesis about development of these persistent bacteria ispatho-physiological environment in human lesions namely, reduced oxygentension, nutrient limitation, and acidic pH. These factors have beenpostulated to render these bacteria phenotypically tolerant to majoranti-mycobacterial drugs.

In addition to the management of the TB epidemic, there is the emergingproblem of resistance to first-line antibiotic agents. Some importantexamples include penicillin-resistant Streptococcus pneumoniae,vancomycin-resistant enterococci, methicillin-resistant Staphylococcusaureus, multi-resistant salmonellae.

The consequences of resistance to antibiotic agents are severe.Infections caused by resistant microbes fail to respond to treatment,resulting in prolonged illness and greater risk of death. Treatmentfailures also lead to longer periods of infectivity, which increase thenumbers of infected people moving in the community and thus exposing thegeneral population to the risk of contracting a resistant straininfection. Hospitals are a critical component of the antimicrobialresistance problem worldwide. The combination of highly susceptiblepatients, intensive and prolonged antimicrobial use, and cross-infectionhas resulted in infections with highly resistant bacterial pathogens.

Self-medication with antimicrobials is another major factor contributingto resistance. Self-medicated antimicrobials may be unnecessary, areoften inadequately dosed, or may not contain adequate amounts of activedrug.

Patient compliance with recommended treatment is another major problem.Patients forget to take medication, interrupt their treatment when theybegin to feel better, or may be unable to afford a full course, therebycreating an ideal environment for microbes to adapt rather than bekilled.

Because of the emerging resistance to multiple antibiotics, physiciansare confronted with infections for which there is no effective therapy.The morbidity, mortality, and financial costs of such infections imposean increasing burden for health care systems worldwide.

Therefore, there is a high need for new compounds to treat bacterialinfections, especially mycobacterial infections including drug resistantand latent mycobacterial infections, and also other bacterial infectionsespecially those caused by resistant bacterial strains.

Anti-infective compounds for treating tuberculosis have been disclosedin e.g. international patent application WO 2011/113606. Such a documentis concerned with compounds that would prevent M. tuberculosismultiplication inside the host macrophage and relates to compounds witha bicyclic core, imidazopyridines, which are linked (e.g. via an amidomoiety) to e.g. an optionally substituted benzyl group.

International patent application WO 2014/015167 also discloses compoundsthat are disclosed as being of potential use in the treatment oftuberculosis. Such compounds disclosed herein have a bicycle (a5,5-fused bicycle) as an essential element, which is substituted by alinker group (e.g. an amido group), which itself may be attached toanother bicycle or aromatic group. Such compounds in this document donot contain a series of more than three rings.

Journal article Nature Medicine, 19, 1157-1160 (2013) by Pethe et al“Discovery of Q203, a potent clinical candidate for the treatment oftuberculosis” identifies a specific compound that was tested against M.tuberculosis. This compound Q203 is depicted below.

This clinical candidates is also discussed in journal article, J.Medicinal Chemistry, 2014, 57 (12), pp 5293-5305. It is stated to haveactivity against MDR tuberculosis, and have activity against the strainM. tuberculosis H37Rv at a MIC₅₀ of 0.28 nM inside macrophages. Positivecontrol data (using known anti-TB compounds bedaquiline, isoniazid andmoxifloxacin) are also reported. This document also suggests a mode ofaction, based on studies with mutants. It postulates that it acts byinterfering with ATP synthase in M. tuberculosis, and that theinhibition of cytochrome bc₁ activity is the primary mode of action.Cytochrome bc₁ is an essential component of the electron transport chainrequired for ATP synthesis. It appeared that Q203 was highly activeagainst both replicating and non-replicating bacteria.

International patent application WO 2015/014993 also discloses compoundsas having activity against M. tuberculosis. International patentapplications WO 2013/033070 and WO 2013/033167 disclose variouscompounds as kinase modulators.

The purpose of the present invention is to provide compounds for use inthe treatment of bacterial diseases, particularly those diseases causedby pathogenic bacteria such as Mycobacterium tuberculosis (including thelatent disease and including drug resistant M. tuberculosis strains).Such compounds may also be novel and may act by interfering with ATPsynthase in M. tuberculosis, with the inhibition of cytochrome bc₁activity being considered the primary mode of action.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

There is now provided a compound of formula (I)

wherein

R¹ represents C₁₋₆ alkyl or hydrogen;

L¹ represents a linker group —C(R^(a))(R^(b))— (or is not present);

X¹ represents an optional aromatic linker group;

R^(a) and R^(b) independently represent hydrogen or C₁₋₆ alkyl(optionally substituted by one or more fluoro atoms);

X^(a) represents C(R^(c)) or N;

X^(b) represents C(R^(d)), N, O (in which case L² is not present) or C═O(in which case L² is also not present);

R^(c) and R^(d) independently represent H or —OR^(c) (wherein R^(e)represents H or C₁₋₆ alkyl optionally substituted by one or more fluoroatoms);

q¹ represents —X^(c)—(CH₂)_(n1)—X^(d)—;

n1 represents 0, 1 or 2;

q² represents —X^(e)—(CH₂)_(n2)—X^(f)—;

n2 represents 0, 1 or 2, but wherein n1 and n2 do not both represent 0;

X^(c) (which is attached to X^(a)) is either not present, or, when X^(a)represents CH, then X^(c) may represent —O—, —NH— or —S—;

X^(d) is either not present, or, when n1 represents 2 or when X is notpresent, X^(a) represents C(R^(c)) and n1 represents 1, then X^(d) mayalso represent —O—, —NH— or —S—;

X^(e) and X^(f) independently are either not present, or mayindependently represent —O—, —NH— or —S—, provided that theaforementioned heteroatoms are not directly attached to or α to anotherheteroatom;

q³ represents —X^(g)—(CH₂)_(n3)—X^(h)—.

q⁴ represents —X^(i)—(CH₂)_(n4)—X^(j)—;

n3 represents 0, 1 or 2;

n4 represents 0, 1 or 2, but wherein n3 and n4 do not both represent 0;

X^(g), X^(h), X^(i) and X^(j) independently are either not present, ormay represent —O—, —NH— or —S—, provided that the aforementionedheteroatoms are not directly attached to or α to another heteroatom;

when X^(b) represents O or C═O, then L² is not present;

when X^(b) represents C(R^(d)) (e.g. CH) or N, then L² may representhydrogen, halo, —OR^(f), C₁₋₆ alkyl (optionally substituted by one ormore halo, e.g. fluoro atoms) or an aromatic group (optionallysubstituted by one or more substituents selected from halo, C₁₋₆ alkyl(itself optionally substituted by one or more substituents selected fromfluoro, —CF₃ and/or —SF₅), —OC₁₋₆alkyl (itself optionally substituted byone or more fluoro atoms), —O-phenyl (itself optionally substituted byhalo, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆fluoroalkyl and/or —OC₁₋₆alkyl) or —SF₅);

R^(f) represents hydrogen or C₁₋₆ alkyl (optionally substituted by oneor more fluoro);

ring A is a 5-membered aromatic ring containing at least one heteroatom(preferably containing at least one nitrogen atom);

ring B is a 5- or 6-membered ring, which may be aromatic ornon-aromatic, optionally containing one to four heteroatoms (preferablyselected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur);

either ring A and/or ring B may be optionally substituted by one or moresubstituents selected from: halo, C₁₋₆ alkyl (optionally substituted byone or more halo, e.g. fluoro atoms) and/or —OC₁₋₆alkyl (itselfoptionally substituted by one or more fluoro atoms),

or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof,

which compounds may be referred to herein as “compounds of theinvention”.

In particular, in a major embodiment of the invention, the followingcompounds of formula (IA) are provided for use in the treatment oftuberculosis:

wherein

R^(l) represents C₁₋₆ alkyl or hydrogen;

L¹ represents a linker group —C(R^(a))(R^(b))—;

X¹ represents an optional carbocyclic aromatic linker group (whichlinker group may itself be optionally substituted by one or moresubstituents selected from fluoro, —OH, —OC₁₋₆ alkyl and C₁₋₆ alkyl,wherein the latter two alkyl moieties are themselves optionallysubstituted by one or more fluoro atoms);

R^(a) and R^(b) independently represent hydrogen or C₁₋₆ alkyl(optionally substituted by one or more fluoro atoms);

X^(a) represents C(R^(c)) or N;

X^(b) represents C(R^(d)), N, O (in which case L² is not present) or C═O(in which case L² is also not present);

R^(c) and R^(d) independently represent H, F or —OR^(e) (wherein R^(e)represents H or C₁₋₆ alkyl optionally substituted by one or more fluoroatoms), or, R^(d) and L² may be linked together to form a 4- to6-membered cyclic group (i.e. a spiro-cycle), optionally containing oneto three heteroatoms;

q¹ represents —X^(e)—(CH₂)_(n1)—X^(d)—;

n1 represents 0, 1 or 2;

q² represents —X^(e)—(CH₂)_(n2)—X^(f)—;

n2 represents 0, 1 or 2, but wherein n1 and n2 do not both represent 0;

X^(e) (which is attached to X^(a)) is either not present, or, when X^(a)represents CH, then X^(e) may represent —O—, —NH— or —S—;

X^(d) is either not present, or, when n1 represents 2 or when X is notpresent, X^(a) represents C(R^(c)) and n1 represents 1, then X^(d) mayalso represent —O—, —NH— or —S—;

X^(e) and X^(f) independently are either not present, or mayindependently represent —O—, —NH— or —S—, provided that theaforementioned heteroatoms are not directly attached to or α to anotherheteroatom;

q³ represents —X^(g)—(CH₂)_(n3)—X^(h)—.

q⁴ represents —X^(i)—(CH₂)_(n4)—X^(j)—;

n3 represents 0, 1 or 2;

n4 represents 0, 1 or 2, but wherein n3 and n4 do not both represent 0;

X^(g), X^(h), X^(i) and X^(j) independently are either not present, ormay represent —O—, —NH— or —S—, provided that the aforementionedheteroatoms are not directly attached to or α to another heteroatom;

when X^(b) represents O or C═O, then L² is not present;

when X^(b) represents C(R^(d)) (e.g. CH) or N, then L² may representhydrogen, halo, —OR^(f), —C(O)—R^(g), C₁₋₆ alkyl (optionally substitutedby one or more halo, e.g. fluoro atoms) or an aromatic group (optionallysubstituted by one or more substituents selected from halo, C₁₋₆ alkyl(itself optionally substituted by one or more substituents selected fromfluoro, —CF₃ and/or —SF₅), —OC₁₋₆alkyl (itself optionally substituted byone or more fluoro atoms), —O— phenyl (itself optionally substituted byhalo, C₁₋₆alkyl,

C₁₋₆fluoroalkyl and/or —OC₁₋₆alkyl) or —SF₅);

R^(f) represents hydrogen, C₁₋₆ alkyl (optionally substituted by one ormore fluoro) or an aromatic group (itself optionally substituted by oneor more substituents selected from halo, C₁₋₆alkyl and —OC₁₋₆alkyl,where the latter two alkyl moieties may themselves be optionallysubstituted by one or more fluoro atoms);

R^(g) represents hydrogen or C₁₋₆alkyl (optionally substituted by one ormore substituents selected from fluoro, or —OC₁₋₃ alkyl, which lattermoiety is also optionally substituted by one or more fluoro atoms) or anaromatic group (optionally substituted by one or more substituentsselected from halo, C₁₋₆ alkyl or —OC₁₋₆alkyl);

ring A may be attached to the requisite amide moiety (i.e. the—C(O)—N(R¹)— moiety) via either one of two possible bonds represented bythe dotted lines, which bonds are linked to ring A at two differentatoms (of that ring);

ring A is a 5-membered aromatic ring containing at least one heteroatom(preferably containing at least one nitrogen atom);

ring B is a 5- or 6-membered ring, which may be aromatic ornon-aromatic, optionally containing one to four heteroatoms (preferablyselected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur);

either ring A and/or ring B may be optionally substituted by one or moresubstituents selected from: halo, C₁₋₆ alkyl (optionally substituted byone or more halo, e.g. fluoro atoms) and/or —OC₁₋₆alkyl (itselfoptionally substituted by one or more fluoro atoms),

or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof,

which compounds may also be referred to herein as “compounds of theinvention”.

For instance, compounds of formula (IA) may as described above, may besuch that the ring A is linked to the amide moiety via a specific ringatom, as depicted by compounds of formula (I) below:

This embodiment is essentially a graphical depiction of ring A beinglinked to the requisite amido moiety via a bond represented by one ofthe dotted lines in formula (IA).

Pharmaceutically-acceptable salts include acid addition salts and baseaddition salts. Such salts may be formed by conventional means, forexample by reaction of a free acid or a free base form of a compound offormula I with one or more equivalents of an appropriate acid or base,optionally in a solvent, or in a medium in which the salt is insoluble,followed by removal of said solvent, or said medium, using standardtechniques (e.g. in vacuo, by freeze-drying or by filtration). Salts mayalso be prepared by exchanging a counter-ion of a compound of theinvention in the form of a salt with another counter-ion, for exampleusing a suitable ion exchange resin.

The pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts as mentionedhereinabove are meant to comprise the therapeutically active non-toxicacid addition salt forms that the compounds of formula (I) are able toform. These pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts canconveniently be obtained by treating the base form with such appropriateacid. Appropriate acids comprise, for example, inorganic acids such ashydrohalic acids, e.g. hydrochloric or hydrobromic acid, sulfuric,nitric, phosphoric and the like acids; or organic acids such as, forexample, acetic, propanoic, hydroxyacetic, lactic, pyruvic, oxalic (i.e.ethanedioic), malonic, succinic (i.e. butanedioic acid), maleic,fumaric, malic, tartaric, citric, methanesulfonic, ethanesulfonic,benzenesulfonic, p-toluenesulfonic, cyclamic, salicylic,p-aminosalicylic, pamoic and the like acids.

For the purposes of this invention solvates, prodrugs, N-oxides andstereoisomers of compounds of the invention are also included within thescope of the invention.

The term “prodrug” of a relevant compound of the invention includes anycompound that, following oral or parenteral administration, ismetabolised in vivo to form that compound in anexperimentally-detectable amount, and within a predetermined time (e.g.within a dosing interval of between 6 and 24 hours (i.e. once to fourtimes daily)). For the avoidance of doubt, the term “parenteral”administration includes all forms of administration other than oraladministration.

Prodrugs of compounds of the invention may be prepared by modifyingfunctional groups present on the compound in such a way that themodifications are cleaved, in vivo when such prodrug is administered toa mammalian subject. The modifications typically are achieved bysynthesising the parent compound with a prodrug substituent. Prodrugsinclude compounds of the invention wherein a hydroxyl, amino,sulfhydryl, carboxy or carbonyl group in a compound of the invention isbonded to any group that may be cleaved in vivo to regenerate the freehydroxyl, amino, sulfhydryl, carboxy or carbonyl group, respectively.

Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, esters andcarbamates of hydroxy functional groups, esters groups of carboxylfunctional groups, N-acyl derivatives and N-Mannich bases. Generalinformation on prodrugs may be found e.g. in Bundegaard, H. “Design ofProdrugs” p. 1-92, Elesevier, New York-Oxford (1985).

Compounds of the invention may contain double bonds and may thus existas E (entgegen) and Z (zusammen) geometric isomers about each individualdouble bond. Positional isomers may also be embraced by the compounds ofthe invention. All such isomers (e.g. if a compound of the inventionincorporates a double bond or a fused ring, the cis- and trans-forms,are embraced) and mixtures thereof are included within the scope of theinvention (e.g. single positional isomers and mixtures of positionalisomers may be included within the scope of the invention).

Compounds of the invention may also exhibit tautomerism. All tautomericforms (or tautomers) and mixtures thereof are included within the scopeof the invention. The term “tautomer” or “tautomeric form” refers tostructural isomers of different energies which are interconvertible viaa low energy barrier. For example, proton tautomers (also known asprototropic tautomers) include interconversions via migration of aproton, such as keto-enol and imine-enamine isomerisations. Valencetautomers include interconversions by reorganisation of some of thebonding electrons.

Compounds of the invention may also contain one or more asymmetriccarbon atoms and may therefore exhibit optical and/ordiastereoisomerism. Diastereoisomers may be separated using conventionaltechniques, e.g. chromatography or fractional crystallisation. Thevarious stereoisomers may be isolated by separation of a racemic orother mixture of the compounds using conventional, e.g. fractionalcrystallisation or HPLC, techniques. Alternatively the desired opticalisomers may be made by reaction of the appropriate optically activestarting materials under conditions which will not cause racemisation orepimerisation (i.e. a ‘chiral pool’ method), by reaction of theappropriate starting material with a ‘chiral auxiliary’ which cansubsequently be removed at a suitable stage, by derivatisation (i.e. aresolution, including a dynamic resolution), for example with ahomochiral acid followed by separation of the diastereomeric derivativesby conventional means such as chromatography, or by reaction with anappropriate chiral reagent or chiral catalyst all under conditions knownto the skilled person.

All stereoisomers (including but not limited to diastereoisomers,enantiomers and atropisomers) and mixtures thereof (e.g. racemicmixtures) are included within the scope of the invention.

In the structures shown herein, where the stereochemistry of anyparticular chiral atom is not specified, then all stereoisomers arecontemplated and included as the compounds of the invention. Wherestereochemistry is specified by a solid wedge or dashed linerepresenting a particular configuration, then that stereoisomer is sospecified and defined.

The compounds of the present invention may exist in unsolvated as wellas solvated forms with pharmaceutically acceptable solvents such aswater, ethanol, and the like, and it is intended that the inventionembrace both solvated and unsolvated forms.

The present invention also embraces isotopically-labeled compounds ofthe present invention which are identical to those recited herein, butfor the fact that one or more atoms are replaced by an atom having anatomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass numberusually found in nature (or the most abundant one found in nature). Allisotopes of any particular atom or element as specified herein arecontemplated within the scope of the compounds of the invention.Exemplary isotopes that can be incorporated into compounds of theinvention include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen,phosphorus, sulfur, fluorine, chlorine and iodine, such as ²H, ³H, ¹¹C,¹³C, ¹⁴C, ¹³N, ¹⁵O, ¹⁷O, ¹⁸O, ³²P, ³³P, ³⁵S, ¹⁸F, ³⁶Cl, ¹²³I, and ¹²⁵I.Certain isotopically-labeled compounds of the present invention (e.g.,those labeled with ³H and ¹⁴C) are useful in compound and for substratetissue distribution assays. Tritiated (³H) and carbon-14 (¹⁴C) isotopesare useful for their ease of preparation and detectability. Further,substitution with heavier isotopes such as deuterium (i.e., ²H mayafford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolicstability (e.g., increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosagerequirements) and hence may be preferred in some circumstances. Positronemitting isotopes such as ¹⁵O, ¹³N, ¹¹C and ¹⁸F are useful for positronemission tomography (PET) studies to examine substrate receptoroccupancy. Isotopically labeled compounds of the present invention cangenerally be prepared by following procedures analogous to thosedisclosed in the description/Examples hereinbelow, by substituting anisotopically labeled reagent for a non-isotopically labeled reagent.

Unless otherwise specified, C_(1-q) alkyl groups (where q is the upperlimit of the range) defined herein may be straight-chain or, when thereis a sufficient number (i.e. a minimum of two or three, as appropriate)of carbon atoms, be branched-chain, and/or cyclic (so forming aC_(3-q)-cycloalkyl group). Such cycloalkyl groups may be monocyclic orbicyclic and may further be bridged. Further, when there is a sufficientnumber (i.e. a minimum of four) of carbon atoms, such groups may also bepart cyclic. Such alkyl groups may also be saturated or, when there is asufficient number (i.e. a minimum of two) of carbon atoms, beunsaturated (forming, for example, a C_(2-q) alkenyl or a C_(2-q)alkynyl group). C_(3-q) cycloalkyl groups (where q is the upper limit ofthe range) that may be specifically mentioned may be monocyclic orbicyclic alkyl groups, which cycloalkyl groups may further be bridged(so forming, for example, fused ring systems such as three fusedcycloalkyl groups). Such cycloalkyl groups may be saturated orunsaturated containing one or more double bonds (forming for example acycloalkenyl group). Substituents may be attached at any point on thecycloalkyl group. Further, where there is a sufficient number (i.e. aminimum of four) such cycloalkyl groups may also be part cyclic.

The term “halo”, when used herein, preferably includes fluoro, chloro,bromo and iodo.

Heterocyclic groups when referred to herein may include aromatic ornon-aromatic heterocyclic groups, and hence encompass heterocycloalkyland hetereoaryl. Equally, “aromatic or non-aromatic 5- or 6-memberedrings” may be heterocyclic groups (as well as carbocyclic groups) thathave 5- or 6-members in the ring.

Heterocycloalkyl groups that may be mentioned include non-aromaticmonocyclic and bicyclic heterocycloalkyl groups in which at least one(e.g. one to four) of the atoms in the ring system is other than carbon(i.e. a heteroatom), and in which the total number of atoms in the ringsystem is between 3 and 20 (e.g. between three and ten, e.g between 3and 8, such as 5- to 8-). Such heterocycloalkyl groups may also bebridged. Further, such heterocycloalkyl groups may be saturated orunsaturated containing one or more double and/or triple bonds, formingfor example a C_(2-q) heterocycloalkenyl (where q is the upper limit ofthe range) group. C_(2-q) heterocycloalkyl groups that may be mentionedinclude 7-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptanyl, 6-azabicyclo[3.1.1]heptanyl,6-azabicyclo[3.2.1]-octanyl, 8-azabicyclo-[3.2.1]octanyl, aziridinyl,azetidinyl, dihydropyranyl, dihydropyridyl, dihydropyrrolyl (including2,5-dihydropyrrolyl), dioxolanyl (including 1,3-dioxolanyl), dioxanyl(including 1,3-dioxanyl and 1,4-dioxanyl), dithianyl (including1,4-dithianyl), dithiolanyl (including 1,3-dithiolanyl), imidazolidinyl,imidazolinyl, morpholinyl, 7-oxabicyclo[2.2.1]heptanyl,6-oxabicyclo-[3.2.1]octanyl, oxetanyl, oxiranyl, piperazinyl,piperidinyl, non-aromatic pyranyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrrolidinonyl,pyrrolidinyl, pyrrolinyl, quinuclidinyl, sulfolanyl, 3-sulfolenyl,tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyridyl (such as1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyridyl and 1,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridyl), thietanyl,thiiranyl, thiolanyl, thiomorpholinyl, trithianyl (including1,3,5-trithianyl), tropanyl and the like. Substituents onheterocycloalkyl groups may, where appropriate, be located on any atomin the ring system including a heteroatom. The point of attachment ofheterocycloalkyl groups may be via any atom in the ring system including(where appropriate) a heteroatom (such as a nitrogen atom), or an atomon any fused carbocyclic ring that may be present as part of the ringsystem. Heterocycloalkyl groups may also be in the N- or S-oxidisedform. Heterocycloalkyl mentioned herein may be stated to be specificallymonocyclic or bicyclic.

Aromatic groups may be aryl or heteroaryl. Aryl groups that may bementioned include C₆₋₂₀, such as C₆₋₁₂ (e.g. C₆₋₁₀) aryl groups. Suchgroups may be monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic and have between 6 and12 (e.g. 6 and 10) ring carbon atoms, in which at least one ring isaromatic. C₆₋₁₀ aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl and the like, suchas 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthyl. The point of attachment of aryl groupsmay be via any atom of the ring system. For example, when the aryl groupis polycyclic the point of attachment may be via atom including an atomof a non-aromatic ring. However, when aryl groups are polycyclic (e.g.bicyclic or tricyclic), they are preferably linked to the rest of themolecule via an aromatic ring. Most preferred aryl groups that may bementioned herein are “phenyl”.

Unless otherwise specified, the term “heteroaryl” when used hereinrefers to an aromatic group containing one or more heteroatom(s) (e.g.one to four heteroatoms) preferably selected from N, O and S. Heteroarylgroups include those which have between 5 and 20 members (e.g. between 5and 10) and may be monocyclic, bicyclic or tricyclic, provided that atleast one of the rings is aromatic (so forming, for example, a mono-,bi-, or tricyclic heteroaromatic group). When the heteroaryl group ispolycyclic the point of attachment may be via any atom including an atomof a non-aromatic ring. However, when heteroaryl groups are polycyclic(e.g. bicyclic or tricyclic), they are preferably linked to the rest ofthe molecule via an aromatic ring. Heteroaryl groups that may bementioned include 3,4-dihydro-1H-isoquinolinyl, 1,3-dihydroisoindolyl,1,3-dihydroisoindolyl (e.g. 3,4-dihydro-1H-isoquinolin-2-yl,1,3-dihydroisoindol-2-yl, 1,3-dihydroisoindol-2-yl; i.e. heteroarylgroups that are linked via a non-aromatic ring), or, preferably,acridinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzodioxanyl, benzodioxepinyl, benzodioxolyl(including 1,3-benzodioxolyl), benzofuranyl, benzofurazanyl,benzothiadiazolyl (including 2,1,3-benzothiadiazolyl), benzothiazolyl,benzoxadiazolyl (including 2,1,3-benzoxadiazolyl), benzoxazinyl(including 3,4-dihydro-2H-1,4-benzoxazinyl), benzoxazolyl,benzomorpholinyl, benzoselenadiazolyl (including2,1,3-benzoselenadiazolyl), benzothienyl, carbazolyl, chromanyl,cinnolinyl, furanyl, imidazolyl, imidazo[1,2-a]pyridyl, indazolyl,indolinyl, indolyl, isobenzofuranyl, isochromanyl, isoindolinyl,isoindolyl, isoquinolinyl, isothiaziolyl, isothiochromanyl, isoxazolyl,naphthyridinyl (including 1,6-naphthyridinyl or, preferably,1,5-naphthyridinyl and 1,8-naphthyridinyl), oxadiazolyl (including1,2,3-oxadiazolyl, 1,2,4-oxadiazolyl and 1,3,4-oxadiazolyl), oxazolyl,phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phthalazinyl, pteridinyl, purinyl, pyranyl,pyrazinyl, pyrazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolyl,quinazolinyl, quinolinyl, quinolizinyl, quinoxalinyl,tetrahydroisoquinolinyl (including 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolinyl and5,6,7,8-tetrahydroisoquinolinyl), tetrahydroquinolinyl (including1,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinolinyl and 5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinolinyl),tetrazolyl, thiadiazolyl (including 1,2,3-thiadiazolyl,1,2,4-thiadiazolyl and 1,3,4-thiadiazolyl), thiazolyl, thiochromanyl,thiophenetyl, thienyl, triazolyl (including 1,2,3-triazolyl,1,2,4-triazolyl and 1,3,4-triazolyl) and the like. Substituents onheteroaryl groups may, where appropriate, be located on any atom in thering system including a heteroatom. The point of attachment ofheteroaryl groups may be via any atom in the ring system including(where appropriate) a heteroatom (such as a nitrogen atom), or an atomon any fused carbocyclic ring that may be present as part of the ringsystem. Heteroaryl groups may also be in the N- or S-oxidised form.Heteroaryl groups mentioned herein may be stated to be specificallymonocyclic or bicyclic. When heteroaryl groups are polycyclic in whichthere is a non-aromatic ring present, then that non-aromatic ring may besubstituted by one or more ═O group. Most preferred heteroaryl groupsthat may be mentioned herein are 5- or 6-membered aromatic groupscontaining 1, 2 or 3 heteroatoms (e.g. preferably selected fromnitrogen, oxygen and sulfur).

It may be specifically stated that the heteroaryl group is monocyclic orbicyclic. In the case where it is specified that the heteroaryl isbicyclic, then it may consist of a five-, six- or seven-memberedmonocyclic ring (e.g. a monocyclic heteroaryl ring) fused with anotherfive-, six- or seven-membered ring (e.g. a monocyclic aryl or heteroarylring).

Heteroatoms that may be mentioned include phosphorus, silicon, boronand, preferably, oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur.

When “aromatic” groups are referred to herein, they may be aryl orheteroaryl. When “aromatic linker groups” are referred to herein, theymay be aryl or heteroaryl, as defined herein, are preferably monocyclic(but may be polycyclic) and attached to the remainder of the moleculevia any possible atoms of that linker group. However, when, specificallycarbocylic aromatic linker groups are referred to, then such aromaticgroups may not contain a heteroatom, i.e. they may be aryl (but notheteroaryl).

For the avoidance of doubt, where it is stated herein that a group maybe substituted by one or more substituents (e.g. selected from C₁₋₆alkyl), then those substituents (e.g. alkyl groups) are independent ofone another. That is, such groups may be substituted with the samesubstituent (e.g. same alkyl substituent) or different (e.g. alkyl)substituents.

All individual features (e.g. preferred features) mentioned herein maybe taken in isolation or in combination with any other feature(including preferred feature) mentioned herein (hence, preferredfeatures may be taken in conjunction with other preferred features, orindependently of them).

The skilled person will appreciate that compounds of the invention thatare the subject of this invention include those that are stable. Thatis, compounds of the invention include those that are sufficientlyrobust to survive isolation from e.g. a reaction mixture to a usefuldegree of purity.

As mentioned hereinbefore, in a major embodiment of the invention thecompounds of the invention are those in which:

L¹ represents a linker group —C(R^(a))(R^(b))—; and

X¹ represents an optional carbocyclic aromatic linker group; and

the compound of formula (IA) represents a compound of formula (I).

Preferred compounds, or other aspects or embodiments, describedhereinbelow may relate to such a major embodiment of the invention (inwhich case inconsistent definitions of L¹ or X¹ are redundant), wheresuch definitions of L¹ and/or X¹ may be taken in combination with one ormore other features or aspects (e.g. those described hereinbelow, suchas some preferred aspects described).

Preferred compounds of the invention include those in which:

when X^(a) represents C(R^(c)), then it is preferably CH;

X^(a) represents CH or N;

R^(e) preferably represents hydrogen;

R^(e) and R^(d) independently (and preferably) represent H;

L¹ preferably represents a linker group as defined by —C(R^(a))(R^(b))—(for the major embodiment of the invention, this linker group isessential);

X¹ may not be present, but preferably represents an aromatic linkergroup (for the major embodiment of the invention, this linker group,when present, has to be a carbocyclic aromatic linker group);

X^(c) (which is attached to X^(a)) is either not present, or, when X^(a)represents CH, then X^(c) may also represent —O—;

X^(d) is either not present, or, when n1 represents 2 or when X^(e) isnot present, X^(a) represents C(R^(e)) and n1 represents 1, then X^(d)may also represent —O—;

X^(e) and X^(f) independently are either not present, or mayindependently represent —O—, provided that the aforementioned oxygenatom is not directly attached to or α to another heteroatom;

when X^(c) and/or X^(d) represent —O—, —NH— or —S—, it is understoodthat such heteroatoms may not be attached directly (or a to) to anotherheteroatom.

More preferred compounds of the invention include those in which:

R¹ represents hydrogen;

R^(a) and R^(b) independently represent hydrogen;

L¹ represents —CH₂—;

when X¹ represents an aromatic linker group (where the point ofattachment may be via any atom of the ring system), that aromatic groupmay be carbocyclic or heterocyclic, so forming, for example, a phenyl, a5- or 6-membered monocyclic heteroaryl group or a bicyclic aromaticgroup (such as a 8- or 10-membered aromatic group, which consists of twoseparate rings fused with each other, in which each ring is 5- or6-membered so forming a 6,6-, 5,6- or 5,5-fused bicyclic ring), henceincluding groups such as phenyl, naphthyl (including fully aromaticnaphthyl and 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthyl) and the like, so forming e.g.in particular:

-phenylene- (especially a 1,4-phenylene), e.g.:

-naphthylene, e.g.:

-quinolylene (such as 2-quinolylene), e.g.:

Such linker groups that X¹ may represent (e.g. phenylene) may beoptionally substituted (e.g. by one or more substituents selected fromfluoro, CH₃, CF₃, —OCH₃ and —OCF₃). In an embodiment such linker groupsthat X¹ may represent are unsubstituted.

In an embodiment (for instance, the major embodiment referred to above)of the invention, the following applies:

X¹ represents an optional carbocyclic aromatic linker group, i.e. it mayor may not be present;

when X¹ is present, then it represents a carbocyclic aromatic linkergroup, for example a phenyl group or a bicyclic (carbocyclic) aromaticlinker group (in which at least one of the rings of the bicycle isaromatic), for instance such that the bicycle consists of two separaterings fused with each other, in which each ring is 5- or 6-membered soforming a 6,6-, 5,6- or 5,5-fused bicyclic ring), hence including groupssuch as phenyl, naphthyl (including fully aromatic naphthyl and1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthyl) and the like, so forming e.g. in particular:

-phenylene- (especially a 1,4-phenylene), e.g.:

-naphthylene, e.g.:

In an aspect of the invention, X¹, i.e. an aromatic linker group (in anembodiment, a carbocylic aromatic linker group, such as one definedabove) is present.

The spiro-cyclic moiety, i.e. the combined X^(a) and X^(b)-containingring may be represented as follows:

Other spiro-cyclic moieties that may be mentioned include the following:

Hence, it may be preferred that:

X^(a) represents N or C(R^(c)) (e.g. CH);

X^(b) represents N, O, C(R^(c)) (e.g. CH) or C═O;

at least one of X^(a) and X^(b) represents N and the other representsC(R^(c)), N or (in the case of X^(b)) O;

it is preferred that both X^(a) and X^(b) do not represent C(R^(c));

X^(c) is not present or represents —O—;

X^(d) is not present;

X^(e) is not present;

X^(f) is not present;

X^(g), X^(h), X^(i) and X^(j) independently are not present;

n1 represents 0, 1 or 2;

n2 represents 1 or 2;

n3 represents 1 or 2;

n4 represents 1 or 2;

L² may represent hydrogen, halo (e.g. fluoro), —OR^(f), or an aromaticgroup (optionally substituted by one or two (e.g. one) substituent(s)selected from —OC₁₋₆alkyl (itself optionally substituted by one or morefluoro atoms) or —SF₅, or, alternatively by halo, e.g. fluoro);

more specifically, L² may represent hydrogen, halo (e.g. fluoro), —OH,phenyl (optionally substituted by —OCF₃, —SF₅ and/or alternatively by—OCH₃ or fluoro; in a further embodiment, other substituents that may bementioned include —SCF₃), pyridyl (e.g. 3-pyridyl, which is preferablyunsubstituted or, alternatively, 2- or 4-pyridyl, which is alsopreferably unsubstituted), triazolyl or thiazolyl;

alternatively, other L² groups that may be mentioned include —OR^(f),for instance in which R^(f) represents C₁₋₆alkyl (e.g. methyl, —CH₃) oran aryl group (e.g. phenyl) optionally substituted by C₁₋₃alkyl (itselfoptionally substituted by one or more fluoro atoms, so forming e.g. a—CF₃ group) or L² may represent —C(O)—R^(g), in which R^(g) representshydrogen or C₁₋₃alkyl (e.g. methyl; optionally substituted by fluoro soforming e.g. a —CF₃ group) or phenyl (preferably unsubstituted); henceL² may also represent —C(O)H, —C(O)CH₃, —C(O)CF₃, —C(O)-phenyl, —OCH₃ or—O-phenyl, i.e. phenoxy, which latter group may be substituted by a —CF₃moiety (or L² and R^(d) may be linked together to form a cyclic group).In a further embodiment, yet other L² groups that may additionally bementioned (e.g. when attached to nitrogen, when X^(b) is N) include—S(O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl groups optionally substituted by one or more fluoroatoms (e.g. forming —S(O)₂CF₃).

In a further embodiment, X^(b) may also represent S, S(O) or, in apreferred embodiment, S(O)₂.

It is further preferred that:

q¹ represents —CH₂—, —CH₂—CH₂—, —O—CH₂— or “-” (i.e. in the latter case,n1=0, X^(c) is not present and X^(d) is not present);

q² represents —CH₂— or —CH₂—CH₂—;

q³ represents —CH₂— or —CH₂—CH₂—;

q⁴ represents —CH₂— or —CH₂—CH₂—.

It is preferred that compounds of the invention comprise:

ring A, which is an aromatic ring containing at least one to three (e.g.one or two) heteroatoms, preferably contains at least one nitrogen atom;

ring B is more preferably also an aromatic ring (e.g. a 5- or especiallya 6-membered aromatic ring), preferably containing at least one nitrogenatom.

It is preferred that Ring A of the compounds of the invention arerepresented as follows:

Other preferred ring A moieties include:

Monocyclic heteroaryl groups that may be mentioned include 5- or6-membered rings containing one to four heteroatoms (preferably selectedfrom nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur). It is preferred that Ring B of thecompounds of the invention are represented as follows:

where “SUB” may be a relevant optional substituent (or more than whenrelevant substituent, where possible) on a carbon atom or, wherepossible, on a heteroatom e.g. on a NH, thus replacing the H.

Other preferred “Ring B” moieties include:

Preferred substituents (when present; e.g such optional substituents maybe absent or there may be one) on ring B include C₁₋₃ alkyl (e.g.methyl) or halo (e.g. bromo or, more preferably, chloro). Otherpreferred substituents on ring B include —OC₁₋₆alkyl (e.g. —OC₁₋₃ alkyl,such as —OCH₃).

Preferred substituents (when present; preferably, there may be one ortwo substituents) on ring A include C₁₋₃ alkyl (e.g. methyl or ethyl).When L² represents an aromatic group (e.g. phenyl or pyridyl) and suchgroups are substituted, preferred substituents include halo andespecially —OC₁₋₃ alkyl (e.g. —O-methyl), where the latter issubstituted by fluoro, so forming for example a —OCF₃ group.

The combined ring systems, i.e. Ring A and Ring B may be represented asfollows:

where “SUB” represents one or more possible substituents on the bicycle(i.e. on ring A and/or on ring B) and “Sub” represents a possibleoptional substituent on the N atom of the bicycle (unsubstituted in thiscontext would mean “NH”).

Other combined ring A and ring B systems that may be mentioned includethe following:

The combined ring A and ring B systems that may be mentioned when ring Ais attached to the amido moiety via the “central” atom of the 5-memberedA ring include the following:

The following compounds of formula (IA) are preferred:

wherein

the integers are as hereinbefore defined, and where, preferably:

n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently represent 1;

at least one of X^(a) and X^(b) represents N and the other represents CHor N.

Certain compounds of the invention are mentioned (e.g. hereinbefore) foruse in the treatment of tuberculosis. Certain of such compoundsmentioned herein may also be novel per se. And certain of such compoundsmentioned herein may be novel as medicaments/pharmaceuticals (or novelas a component of a pharmaceutical composition/formulation). Hence, infurther aspects of the invention, there is provided the followingcompounds per se or following compounds for use aspharmaceuticals/medicaments (in the latter case such compounds may becomponents of a pharmaceutical composition/formulation):

-   -   (I) Compounds of formula (IB) as depicted below:

-   -   -   wherein        -   the integers are as hereinbefore defined, and where,            preferably:        -   n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently represent 1;        -   at least one of X^(a) and X^(b) represents N and the other            represents CH or N;

    -   (II) Compounds of formula (IA) as hereinbefore defined and in        which:        -   L¹ represents —CH₂—;        -   X¹ is not present;        -   at least one of X^(a) and X^(b) represents N and the other            represents C(R^(c)), N or (in the case of X^(b)) O;        -   the X^(a) and X^(b)-containing spiro-cycle 3- to 6-membered            ring attached to a 4- to 6-membered ring;        -   in one aspect L² represents an aromatic group (as defined            herein) optionally substituted as defined herein, and/or, in            another aspect L² represents —OR^(f) in which R^(f)            represents an aryl group (as defined herein) optionally            substituted as defined herein;        -   when L² represents an (optionally substituted) aromatic            group, it may be phenyl or a 5- or 6-membered heterocyclic            group (e.g. containing at least one nitrogen atom, so            forming a pyridyl, thiazolyl or triazolyl ring; in a major            embodiment        -   the heterocyclic group is a pyridyl), where the optional            substituents are as defined herein;        -   optional substituents on aromatic L² groups are selected            from halo, C₁₋₆alkyl, —CF₃, —OC₁₋₆alkyl and —OCF₃;        -   when R^(f) represents an aryl group, then it is preferably            phenyl optionally substituted by C₁₋₃ alkyl, itself            optionally substituted by fluoro); ring A and ring B            together represent a 8 or 9-membered bicyclic ring (ring A            is a 5-membered ring and ring B may be a 5 or 6-membered            ring, in which both rings are preferably aromatic)            containing at least one nitrogen atom (and in a major            embodiment, at least one nitrogen atom that is common to            both rings); optional substituents on ring A and ring B are            halo, C₁₋₃ alkyl and —OC₁₋₃alkyl;

    -   (III) Compounds of formula (IA) as hereinbefore defined and in        which:        -   L¹ represents —CH₂—;        -   X¹ represents a carbocyclic aromatic linker group;        -   when X¹ represents a carbocyclic linker group it represents            phenylene (e.g. a 1,4-phenylene) for instance:

-   -   -   at least one of X^(a) and X^(b) represents N and the other            represents C(R^(c)), N or (in the case of X^(b)) O;        -   the X^(a) and X^(b)-containing spiro-cycle 3- to 6-membered            ring attached to a 4- to 6-membered ring;        -   in one aspect L² represents an aromatic group (as defined            herein) optionally substituted as defined herein, and/or, in            another aspect L² represents —OR^(f) in which R^(f)            represents an aryl group (as defined herein) optionally            substituted as defined herein;        -   when L² represents an (optionally substituted) aromatic            group, it may be phenyl or a 5- or 6-membered heterocyclic            group (e.g. containing at least one nitrogen atom, so            forming a pyridyl, thiazolyl or triazolyl ring; in a major            embodiment the heterocyclic group is a pyridyl), where the            optional substituents are as defined herein;        -   optional substituents on aromatic L² groups are selected            from halo, C₁₋₆alkyl, —CF₃, —OC₁₋₆ alkyl and —OCF₃;        -   when R^(f) represents an aryl group, then it is preferably            phenyl optionally substituted by C₁₋₃ alkyl, itself            optionally substituted by fluoro);        -   ring A and ring B together represent a 8 or 9-membered            bicyclic ring (ring A is a 5-membered ring and ring B may be            a 5 or 6-membered ring, in which both rings are preferably            aromatic) containing at least one nitrogen atom (and in a            major embodiment, at least one nitrogen atom that is common            to both rings); optional substituents on ring A and ring B            are halo, C₁₋₃ alkyl and —OC₁₋₃ alkyl;

    -   (IV) Compounds as hereinbefore defined (e.g. at (I), (II)        or (III) above) and further in which:        -   q¹ represents —CH₂—, —CH₂—CH₂—, —O—CH₂— or “-” (i.e. in the            latter case, n1=0, X^(c) is not present and X^(d) is not            present);        -   q² represents —CH₂— or —CH₂—CH₂—;        -   q³ represents —CH₂— or —CH₂—CH₂—;        -   q⁴ represents —CH₂— or —CH₂—CH₂—;

    -   (V) Compounds as hereinbefore defined (e.g. at (I), (II), (III)        or (IV) above) and further in which the X^(a) and        X^(b)-containing rings are represented as defined herein or more        particularly as follows:

-   -   -   (or any one of the above-mentioned representations); and/or

    -   (VI) Compounds as hereinbefore defined (e.g. at (I), (II),        (III), (IV) or (V) above) and further in which the ring A and        ring B bicycles are represented as defined herein or more        particularly as follows:

-   -   (or any one of the above-mentioned representations).

Pharmacology

The compounds according to the invention have surprisingly been shown tobe suitable for the treatment of a bacterial infection including amycobacterial infection, particularly those diseases caused bypathogenic mycobacteria such as Mycobacterium tuberculosis (includingthe latent and drug resistant form thereof). The present invention thusalso relates to compounds of the invention as defined hereinabove, foruse as a medicine, in particular for use as a medicine for the treatmentof a bacterial infection including a mycobacterial infection.

Such compounds of the invention may act by interfering with ATP synthasein M. tuberculosis, with the inhibition of cytochrome bc₁ activity beingthe primary mode of action. Cytochrome bc₁ is an essential component ofthe electron transport chain required for ATP synthesis.

Further, the present invention also relates to the use of a compound ofthe invention, as well as any of the pharmaceutical compositions thereofas described hereinafter for the manufacture of a medicament for thetreatment of a bacterial infection including a mycobacterial infection.

Accordingly, in another aspect, the invention provides a method oftreating a patient suffering from, or at risk of, a bacterial infection,including a mycobacterial infection, which comprises administering tothe patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound orpharmaceutical composition according to the invention.

The compounds of the present invention also show activity againstresistant bacterial strains.

Whenever used hereinbefore or hereinafter, that the compounds can treata bacterial infection it is meant that the compounds can treat aninfection with one or more bacterial strains.

The invention also relates to a composition comprising apharmaceutically acceptable carrier and, as active ingredient, atherapeutically effective amount of a compound according to theinvention. The compounds according to the invention may be formulatedinto various pharmaceutical forms for administration purposes. Asappropriate compositions there may be cited all compositions usuallyemployed for systemically administering drugs. To prepare thepharmaceutical compositions of this invention, an effective amount ofthe particular compound, optionally in addition salt form, as the activeingredient is combined in intimate admixture with a pharmaceuticallyacceptable carrier, which carrier may take a wide variety of formsdepending on the form of preparation desired for administration. Thesepharmaceutical compositions are desirable in unitary dosage formsuitable, in particular, for administration orally or by parenteralinjection. For example, in preparing the compositions in oral dosageform, any of the usual pharmaceutical media may be employed such as, forexample, water, glycols, oils, alcohols and the like in the case of oralliquid preparations such as suspensions, syrups, elixirs, emulsions andsolutions; or solid carriers such as starches, sugars, kaolin, diluents,lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents and the like in the case ofpowders, pills, capsules and tablets. Because of their ease inadministration, tablets and capsules represent the most advantageousoral dosage unit forms in which case solid pharmaceutical carriers areobviously employed. For parenteral compositions, the carrier willusually comprise sterile water, at least in large part, though otheringredients, for example, to aid solubility, may be included. Injectablesolutions, for example, may be prepared in which the carrier comprisessaline solution, glucose solution or a mixture of saline and glucosesolution. Injectable suspensions may also be prepared in which caseappropriate liquid carriers, suspending agents and the like may beemployed. Also included are solid form preparations which are intendedto be converted, shortly before use, to liquid form preparations.

Depending on the mode of administration, the pharmaceutical compositionwill preferably comprise from 0.05 to 99% by weight, more preferablyfrom 0.1 to 70% by weight, even more preferably from 0.1 to 50% byweight of the active ingredient(s), and, from 1 to 99.95% by weight,more preferably from 30 to 99.9% by weight, even more preferably from 50to 99.9% by weight of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, allpercentages being based on the total weight of the composition.

The pharmaceutical composition may additionally contain various otheringredients known in the art, for example, a lubricant, stabilisingagent, buffering agent, emulsifying agent, viscosity-regulating agent,surfactant, preservative, flavouring or colorant.

It is especially advantageous to formulate the aforementionedpharmaceutical compositions in unit dosage form for ease ofadministration and uniformity of dosage. Unit dosage form as used hereinrefers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages, eachunit containing a predetermined quantity of active ingredient calculatedto produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with therequired pharmaceutical carrier. Examples of such unit dosage forms aretablets (including scored or coated tablets), capsules, pills, powderpackets, wafers, suppositories, injectable solutions or suspensions andthe like, and segregated multiples thereof.

The daily dosage of the compound according to the invention will, ofcourse, vary with the compound employed, the mode of administration, thetreatment desired and the mycobacterial disease indicated. However, ingeneral, satisfactory results will be obtained when the compoundaccording to the invention is administered at a daily dosage notexceeding 1 gram, e.g. in the range from 10 to 50 mg/kg body weight.

Given the fact that the compounds of formula (Ia) or Formula (Ib) areactive against bacterial infections, the present compounds may becombined with other antibacterial agents in order to effectively combatbacterial infections.

Therefore, the present invention also relates to a combination of (a) acompound according to the invention, and (b) one or more otherantibacterial agents.

The present invention also relates to a combination of (a) a compoundaccording to the invention, and (b) one or more other antibacterialagents, for use as a medicine.

The present invention also relates to the use of a combination orpharmaceutical composition as defined directly above for the treatmentof a bacterial infection.

A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptablecarrier and, as active ingredient, a therapeutically effective amount of(a) a compound according to the invention, and (b) one or more otherantibacterial agents, is also comprised by the present invention.

The weight ratio of (a) the compound according to the invention and (b)the other antibacterial agent(s) when given as a combination may bedetermined by the person skilled in the art. Said ratio and the exactdosage and frequency of administration depends on the particularcompound according to the invention and the other antibacterial agent(s)used, the particular condition being treated, the severity of thecondition being treated, the age, weight, gender, diet, time ofadministration and general physical condition of the particular patient,the mode of administration as well as other medication the individualmay be taking, as is well known to those skilled in the art.Furthermore, it is evident that the effective daily amount may belowered or increased depending on the response of the treated subjectand/or depending on the evaluation of the physician prescribing thecompounds of the instant invention. A particular weight ratio for thepresent compound of the invention and another antibacterial agent mayrange from 1/10 to 10/1, more in particular from 1/5 to 5/1, even morein particular from 1/3 to 3/1.

The compounds according to the invention and the one or more otherantibacterial agents may be combined in a single preparation or they maybe formulated in separate preparations so that they can be administeredsimultaneously, separately or sequentially. Thus, the present inventionalso relates to a product containing (a) a compound according to theinvention, and (b) one or more other antibacterial agents, as a combinedpreparation for simultaneous, separate or sequential use in thetreatment of a bacterial infection.

The other antibacterial agents which may be combined with the compoundsof the invention are for example antibacterial agents known in the art.For example, the compounds of the invention may be combined withantibacterial agents known to interfere with the respiratory chain ofMycobacterium tuberculosis, including for example direct inhibitors ofthe ATP synthase (e.g. bedaquiline, bedaquiline fumarate or any othercompounds that may have be disclosed in the prior art, e.g. compoundsdisclosed in WO2004/011436), inhibitors of ndh2 (e.g. clofazimine) andinhibitors of cytochrome bd. Additional mycobacterial agents which maybe combined with the compounds of the invention are for examplerifampicin (=rifampin); isoniazid; pyrazinamide; amikacin; ethionamide;ethambutol; streptomycin; para-aminosalicylic acid; cycloserine;capreomycin; kanamycin; thioacetazone; PA-824; delamanid;quinolones/fluoroquinolones such as for example moxifloxacin,gatifloxacin, ofloxacin, ciprofloxacin, sparfloxacin; macrolides such asfor example clarithromycin, amoxycillin with clavulanic acid;rifamycins; rifabutin; rifapentin; as well as others, which arecurrently being developed (but may not yet be on the market; see e.g.http://www.newtbdrugs.org/pipeline.php).

General Preparation

The compounds according to the invention can generally be prepared by asuccession of steps, each of which may be known to the skilled person ordescribed herein.

Experimental Part

Compounds of formula I may be prepared in accordance with the techniquesemployed in the examples hereinafter (and those methods know by thoseskilled in the art), for example by using the following techniques.

Compounds of formula (I) or (IA) in which X^(b) represents N may beprepared by:

-   -   (i) reaction of a compound of formula (II),

in which the integers are hereinbefore defined, with a compound offormula (III),LG¹-L²  (III)

wherein L² is as hereinbefore defined (for instance when L² is nothydrogen, halo or linked to O or S), and LG¹ is a suitable leaving groupsuch as chloro, bromo, iodo or a sulfonate group, which reaction mayrequire specific conditions (e.g. nucleophilic aromatic substitutionreaction conditions, such as described herein);

-   -   (ii) reaction of a compound of formula (IV),

wherein the integers are as hereinbefore defined, or a suitablederivative thereof, such as a carboxylic acid ester derivative, with acompound of formula (V)

wherein the integers are as hereinbefore defined, under amide couplingreaction conditions, for example in the presence of a suitable couplingreagent (e.g. 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole, N,N′-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide,1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (or hydrochloride thereof)or N,N′-disuccinimidyl carbonate), optionally in the presence of asuitable base (e.g. sodium hydride, sodium bicarbonate, potassiumcarbonate, pyridine, triethylamine, dimethylaminopyridine,diisopropylamine, sodium hydroxide, potassium tert-butoxide and/orlithium diisopropylamide (or variants thereof) and an appropriatesolvent (e.g. tetrahydrofuran, pyridine, toluene, dichloromethane,chloroform, acetonitrile, dimethylformamide, trifluoromethylbenzene,dioxane or triethylamine). Alternatively, the carboxylic acid group ofthe compound of formula (IV) may first be converted under standardconditions to the corresponding acyl chloride (e.g. in the presence ofPOCl₃, PCl₅, SOCl₂ or oxalyl chloride), which acyl chloride is thenreacted with a compound of formula (V), for example under similarconditions to those mentioned above;

-   -   (iii) coupling of a compound of formula (VI),

wherein the integers are as hereinbefore defined, and LG² represents asuitable leaving group, such as iodo, bromo, chloro or a sulfonate group(for example a type of group that may be deployed for a coupling), witha compound of formula (VI),

wherein the integers are as hereinbefore defined, under standardconditions, for example optionally in the presence of an appropriatemetal catalyst (or a salt or complex thereof) such as Pd(dba)₂,Pd(OAc)₂, Cu, Cu(OAc)₂, CuI, NiCl₂ or the like, with an optionaladditive such as Ph₃P, X-phos or the like, in the presence of anappropriate base (e.g. t-BuONa, or the like) in a suitable solvent (e.g.dioxane or the like) under reaction conditions known to those skilled inthe art;

-   -   (iv) coupling of a compound of formula (VIII),

wherein the integers are as hereinbefore defined, and LG³ represents asuitable leaving group as described hereinbefore with respect to LG²(and may particularly represent chloro, bromo or iodo), with a compoundof formula (IX),LG⁴-L²  (IX)

wherein L² is as hereinbefore defined (for instance when L² is nothydrogen, halo or linked to O or S), and LG⁴ is a suitable group such as—B(OH)₂, —B(OR^(wx))₂ or —SN(R^(wx))₃, in which each R^(wx)independently represents a C₁₋₆ alkyl group, or, in the case of—B(OR^(wx))₂, the respective R^(wx) groups may be linked together toform a 4- to 6-membered cyclic group, thereby forming e.g. a pinacolatoboronate ester group (or LG⁴ may represent iodo, bromo or chloro,provided that LG³ and LG⁴ are mutually compatible), and wherein thereaction may be performed in the presence of a suitable catalyst system,e.g. a metal (or a salt or complex thereof) such as Pd, CuI, Pd/C,PdCl₂, Pd(OAc)₂, Pd(Ph₃P)₂Cl₂, Pd(Ph₃P)₄, Pd₂(dba)₃ and/or NiCl₂ (or thelike) and a ligand such as PdCl₂(dppf). DCM, t-BuP, (C₆H₁₁)₃P, Ph₃P orthe like, in a suitable solvent and under reaction conditions known tothose skilled in the art.

It is evident that in the foregoing and in the following reactions, thereaction products may be isolated from the reaction medium and, ifnecessary, further purified according to methodologies generally knownin the art, such as extraction, crystallization and chromatography. Itis further evident that reaction products that exist in more than oneenantiomeric form, may be isolated from their mixture by knowntechniques, in particular preparative chromatography, such aspreparative HPLC, chiral chromatography. Individual diastereoisomers orindividual enantiomers can also be obtained by Supercritical FluidChromatography (SCF).

The starting materials and the intermediates are compounds that areeither commercially available or may be prepared according toconventional reaction procedures generally known in the art.

Synthesis of Compound 1

Preparation of Intermediate A

LiHMDS (50 mL, 1M in THF) was added to a mixture ofN-tert-Butoxycarbonyl-4-piperidone (CAS [79099-07-3], 8.86 g, 50.0 mmol)in THE (180 mL) at −70° C. under N₂ flow. The mixture was stirred for 10minutes. Diethyl cyanomethyl phosphonate (9 g, 45.2 mmol) was added tothe mixture at −70° C. The mixture was stirred for 1 hour. The mixturewas quenched with NH₄Cl solution, extracted with ethyl acetate, washedwith brine, dried over MgSO₄ and filtered. The filtrate was concentratedto give A, 10.0 g, 90.0%.

Preparation of Intermediate B

Me₃SOI (10.9 g, 49.5 mmol) was added slowly to a solution of t-BuOK(5.55 g, 49.5 mmol) in DMSO (60 mL). The mixture was stirred for 1.5hours. A solution of A (10.0 g, 45.0 mmol) in DMSO (80 mL) was added tothe mixture. The mixture was stirred 24 hours at 45° C. Saturated NH₄Clsolution was added to the mixture and stirred for 0.5 hours. The mixturewas extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layers were washed withbrine, dried over MgSO₄ and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated togive B, 10.0 g, 93%.

Preparation of Intermediate C

To a solution of B (460 mg, 1.95 mmol) in MeOH (10 mL) was addedCoCl₂.6H₂O (463 mg, 1.95 mmol). The mixture was stirred at −10° C. for10 min. NaBH₄ (368 mg, 9.74 mmol) was added above the mixture inportions. Then the mixture was stirred for another 1 h. 1M HCl aqueoussolution was added and the solid was dissolved. The aqueous phase wasbasified with aqueous NH₃·H₂O till pH=9 and extracted with ethylacetate. The combined organic layers were dried over Na₂SO₄ andconcentrated in vacuum. The residue was triturated with an oxalic acidsolution in ethyl acetate and filtered to afford a white solid. Thesolid was basified with 1N aqueous NaOH solution and extracted withdichloromethane. The combined organic layers were dried over Na₂SO₄ andconcentrated in vacuum to give C, 120 mg, 26%.

Preparation of Intermediate D

HOBt (55.1 mg, 0.408 mmol),6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[3,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid (CAS[1216142-18-5], 91.7 mg, 0.408 mmol), DIEA (105 mg, 0.816 mmol) andEDCI.HCl (117 mg, 0.612 mmol) were added to a stirred solution of C (100mg, 0.416 mmol) in DMF (10 mL). The mixture was stirred and heated at60° C. for 16 hours. The mixture was concentrated. The residue wasdissolved in ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with H₂O, driedover MgSO₄ and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated to give D, 100mg, 51%.

Preparation of Intermediate E

TFA (5 mL) was added to a mixture of D (90 mg, 0.201 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (5mL) at 0° C.

The mixture was stirred for 5 hours at room temperature. The mixture wasconcentrated under vacuum. The residue was dissolved in CH₂Cl₂ and themixture was adjust to pH=7 with NaHCO₃ solution. The organic layer wasseparated and concentrated. The crude product was purified by columnchromatography over silica gel (eluent: ethyl acetate/petroleum etherfrom 0 to 1). The product fractions were collected and concentrated togive E, 70 mg, 90%.

Preparation of Compound 1

A solution of E (20 mg, 0.058 mmol), 1-iodo-4-(trifluoromethoxy)benzene(CAS [103962-05-6], 16.7 mg, 0.058 mmol), Pd(dba)₂ (3.34 mg, 0.006mmol), Xphos (4.57 mg, 0.009 mmol) and t-BuONa (22.3 mg, 0.232 mmol) in1,4-dioxane (5 mL) was irradiated under microwave at 110° C. for 1 hourunder N₂. The mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue waspurified by high performance liquid chromatography over Gemini (eluent:NH₃ water/acetonitrile 30/70 to 70/30). The desired fractions werecollected and concentrated to give Compound 1, 19.3 mg, 64%.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm 9.47 (s, 1H) 7.54 (d, J=9.29 Hz, 1H) 7.30(dd, J=9.41, 1.83 Hz, 1H) 7.10 (d, J=8.80 Hz, 2H) 6.91 (d, J=9.05 Hz,2H) 5.87 (br. s., 1H) 3.51-3.60 (m, 2H) 3.30-3.42 (m, 2H) 3.08-3.17 (m,2H) 3.02 (q, J=7.58 Hz, 2H) 1.86-1.94 (m, 1H) 1.73-1.82 (m, 1H)1.64-1.69 (m, 1H) 1.43 (t, J=7.58 Hz, 3H) 1.36 (d, J=13.45 Hz, 1H)1.01-1.10 (m, 1H) 0.70 (dd, J=8.44, 4.77 Hz, 1H) 0.38 (t, J=4.89 Hz, 1H)

Synthesis of Compound 2

Preparation of Intermediate F

A mixture of intermediate R (364 mg, 2.47 mmol),trans-2-amino-cyclohexanol (28.5 mg, 0.248 mmol) and Nickel iodine (38.7mg, 0.124 mmol) in i-PrOH (4 mL) was stirred at 25° C. for 30 minutesunder nitrogen flow. NaHMDS (2.48 mL, 1 M in THF) was added, and themixture was stirred for 10 minutes under nitrogen flow. A solution of4-cyanophenylboronic acid (CAS [126747-14-6], 400 mg, 1.24 mmol) ini-PrOH (4 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred at 60° C. undermicrowave for 1 hour, at 90° C. for 1 hour and at 120° C. for 4 hours.The mixture was diluted with dichloromethane (50 mL), washed with water(2×50 mL) and brine (20 mL). The organic layer was dried over sodiumsulfate, filtered and concentrated under vacuum. The residue waspurified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent: petroleumether/ethyl acetate 5/1) to give intermediate F (300 mg, yield: 37%).

Preparation of Intermediate G

A mixture of intermediate F (300 mg, 1.01 mmol) in formic acid (5 mL)was stirred at room temperature for 12 hours. The mixture wasconcentrated and CH₂Cl₂ (30 mL) was added to the mixture. The mixturewas washed with Na₂CO₃ solution (20 mL). The organic layer wasseparated, dried over Na₂SO₄ and filtered. The filtrate was concentratedto give intermediate G (150 mg, yield: 64%).

Preparation of Intermediate H

A solution of intermediate G (100 mg, 0.504 mmol),1-iodo-4-(trifluoromethoxy)benzene (CAS [103962-05-6], 145 mg, 0.504mmol), X-Phos (28.8 mg, 0.06 mmol), Pd(dba)₂ (17.4 mg, 0.03 mmol) andt-BuONa (194 mg, 2.02 mmol) in dioxane (4 mL) was irradiated undermicrowave at 100° C. for 1 hour under N₂. The mixture was concentrated.The crude product was purified by column chromatography over silica gel(eluent: ethyl acetate/petroleum ether from 0 to 1/1). The desiredfractions were collected and concentrated to give intermediate H (100mg, yield: 55%).

Preparation of Intermediate I

A mixture of intermediate H (70.0 mg, 0.195 mmol) in NH₃·MeOH (7M inmethanol, 20 mL) was hydrogenated (15 psi) with Raney Nickel (7 mg) ascatalyst at 25° C. for 16 hours. After uptake of H₂, the catalyst wasfiltered off and the filtrate was concentrated to give intermediate I(50.0 mg, yield: 71%).

Preparation of Compound 2

A solution of 6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[3,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid(CAS [1216142-18-5], 22.5 mg, 0.100 mmol), HATU (49.4 mg, 0.130 mmol),DIEA (33.6 mg, 0.260 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (20 mL) was stirred for 30 minutesat 25° C. Intermediate I (40.0 mg, 0.110 mmol) was added to the mixtureand the mixture was stirred for 2 hours at 25° C. The mixture wasconcentrated under vacuum. The crude product was purified by highperformance liquid chromatography over Gemini (eluent: 0.05% ammonia inwater/methanol 20/80 to 5/95). The desired fractions were collected andconcentrated to give Compound 2 (9.80 mg, yield: 17%).

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ=ppm 9.54 (s, 1H) 7.55 (d, J=9.26 Hz, 1H)7.27-7.37 (m, 3H) 7.22 (d, J=7.94 Hz, 2H) 7.00-7.10 (m, 2H) 6.40 (d,J=8.82 Hz, 2H) 6.11 (br. s., 1H) 4.68 (d, J=5.73 Hz, 2H) 4.01 (s, 2H)3.80 (s, 2H) 3.48 (q, J=8.93 Hz, 1H) 2.98 (q, J=7.50 Hz, 2H) 2.59-2.71(m, 2H) 2.35 (td, J=9.70, 2.65 Hz, 2H) 1.36-1.47 (m, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 3

Preparation of Intermediate J

NBS (45.1 g, 254 mmol) and NH₄OAc (5.33 g, 69.2 mmol) were added to asolution of methyl-3-oxovalerate (CAS[30414-53-0], 30 g, 231 mmol) inmethyl t-butylether (600 mL). The mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 48 h. The mixture was filtered and washed with H₂O,dried over Na₂SO₄ and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated undervacuum. The residue was purified by column chromatography over silicagel (eluent: petroleum ether/ethyl acetate 20/1) to give intermediate J(20.0 g, yield: 35%).

Preparation of Intermediate K

A solution of 5-Chloro-2-pyridinamine (CAS [5428-89-7], 12.0 g, 93.0mmol) and intermediate J (25.0 g, 112 mmol) in ethanol (60 mL) wasrefluxed overnight. The mixture was concentrated under vacuum. Theresidue was dissolved into ethyl acetate (100 mL). The solution waswashed with water (2×100 mL), brine (100 mL), dried over sodium sulfate,filtered and concentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified bycolumn chromatography over silica gel (eluent: petroleum ether/ethylacetate 3/1) to give intermediate K (700 mg, yield: 3%).

Preparation of Intermediate L

A mixture of intermediate K (700 mg, 2.10 mmol) and sodium hydroxide(252 mg, 6.30 mmol) in ethanol (2 ml) and H₂O (2 mL) was stirredovernight at room temperature. Water (20 mL) was added and the solutionwas acidified with 2 M aqueous hydrochloride to pH˜3. The solution waslyophilized to give crude intermediate L (2 g).

Preparation of Compound 3

Accordingly, Compound 3 was prepared in the same way as Compound 2starting from intermediate L and intermediate I, yielding 9.60 mg,yield: 8%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm 9.84 (d, J=2.51 Hz, 1H) 8.57 (d, J=2.76Hz, 1H) 7.30-7.35 (m, 2H) 7.22 (d, J=8.03 Hz, 2H) 7.06 (d, J=8.03 Hz,2H) 6.37-6.43 (m, 2H) 6.14-6.20 (m, 1H) 4.68 (d, J=5.77 Hz, 2H) 4.01 (s,2H) 3.80 (s, 2H) 3.48 (q, J=8.85 Hz, 1H) 3.02 (q, J=7.53 Hz, 2H)2.61-2.70 (m, 2H) 2.31-2.40 (m, 2H) 1.45 (t, J=7.53 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 4

Preparation of Intermediate M

A solution of 6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[3,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid(CAS [12161242-18-5], 1 g, 4.45 mmol), 4-iodobenzenemethanamine (CAS[39959-59-6], 1.09 g, 4.67 mmol), EDCI.HCl (1.28 g, 6.68 mmol), HOBT(0.601 g, 4.45 mmol) and triethylamine (1.24 mL, 9 mmol) indichloromethane (8 mL) was stirred and heated at 45° C. for 24 hours.The solution was cooled down to 15° C. The solid was collected byfiltration, washed with water and acetonitrile and the solid was dried(vacuum, 45° C., 1 hour) to give intermediate M, 1.2 g, 55%.

Preparation of Intermediate N

A solution of tert-butyl 2,6-diazaspiro[3.3]heptane-2-carboxylate (CAS[1041026-70-3], 500 mg, 2.52 mmol), 1-iodo-4-(trifluoromethoxy)benzene(CAS [103962-05-6], 726 mg, 2.52 mmol), X-phos (240 mg, 0.504 mmol),Pd(dba)₂ (145 mg, 0.252 mmol) and t-BuONa (969 mg, 10.1 mmol) in dioxane(8 mL) was irradiated under microwave at 110° C. for 1 hour under N₂.Water was added to the mixture and the mixture was extracted with ethylacetate (50 mL×2). The organic layers were washed brine, dried overMgSO₄ and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated. The crude product waspurified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent: ethylacetate/hexane from 0 to 1/5). The desired fractions were collected andconcentrated to give N, 500 mg, 50%.

Preparation of Intermediate O

A mixture of N (100 mg, 0.279 mmol) in HCOOH (5 mL) was stirred for 12hours. The mixture was concentrated and was used for the next stepwithout further purification.

Preparation of Compound 4

A solution of intermediate O (72 mg, 0.279 mmol), intermediate M (123mg, 0.279 mmol), X-Phos (26.6 mg, 0.056 mmol), Pd(dba)₂ (16.0 mg, 0.028mmol) and t-BuONa (107 mg, 1.12 mmol) in dioxane (8 mL) was irradiatedunder microwave at 110° C. for 1 hour under N₂. The mixture wasconcentrated. The crude product was purified by high performance liquidchromatography over Gemini (eluent: ammonia in water/acetonitrile 50/50to 20/80). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated to giveCompound 4, 35.8 mg, 22%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm=9.53 (d, J=1.25 Hz, 1H) 7.56 (d, J=9.79Hz, 1H) 7.31 (dd, J=9.54, 2.01 Hz, 1H) 7.24 (s, 2H) 7.08 (d, J=8.53 Hz,2H) 6.49 (d, J=8.53 Hz, 2H) 6.42 (d, J=9.03 Hz, 2H) 6.01 (br. s., 1H)4.59 (d, J=5.27 Hz, 2H) 4.04 (s, 4H) 4.02 (s, 4H) 2.96 (q, J=7.36 Hz,2H) 1.39 (t, J=7.53 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 5

Preparation of Intermediate P

A solution of intermediate O (100 mg, 0.387 mmol), 4-iodobenzonitrile(CAS [3058-39-7], 115 mg, 0.503 mmol), X-phos (22.0 mg, 46.2 mmol),Pd(dba)₂ (13.3 mg, 23.1 mmol) and t-BuONa (149 mg, 1.55 mmol) in dioxane(5 mL) was irradiated under microwave at 110° C. for 1 hour under N₂.The mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The crude product waspurified by high performance liquid chromatography over Gemini (eluent:0.05% ammonia in water/methanol 30/70 to 5/95). The desired fractionswere collected and concentrated to give intermediate P (60.0 mg, yield:35%).

Preparation of Intermediate Q

Accordingly, intermediate Q was prepared as the same way as intermediateI starting from intermediate P, yielding 60.0 mg, yield: 99%.

Preparation of Compound 5

A solution of intermediate L (28.3 mg, 0.125 mmol), HATU (61.8 mg, 0.162mmol), DIEA (42.0 mg, 0.325 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was stirred for 30minutes at 25° C. Intermediate Q (50.0 mg, 0.138 mmol) was added to themixture and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours at 25° C. The mixturewas concentrated under vacuum. The crude product was purified by highperformance liquid chromatography over Gemini (eluent: 0.05% ammonia inwater/methanol 25/75 to 5/95). The desired fractions were collected andconcentrated to give Compound 5 (10.3 mg, yield: 14%).

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ=ppm 9.84 (d, J=2.51 Hz, 1H) 8.56 (d, J=2.51Hz, 1H) 7.25 (d, J=8.53 Hz, 2H) 7.08 (d, J=8.78 Hz, 2H) 6.49 (d, J=8.28Hz, 2H) 6.43 (d, J=9.03 Hz, 2H) 6.06 (s, 1H) 4.59 (d, J=5.27 Hz, 2H)4.05 (s, 4H) 4.03 (s, 4H) 2.99 (q, J=7.45 Hz, 2H) 1.43 (t, J=7.53 Hz,3H)

Synthesis of Compound 6

Accordingly, Compound 6 was prepared in the same way as Compound 5starting from 2-ethyl-5H,6H,7F,8H-imidazo[1,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylicacid CA S [1529528-99-1] and intermediate Q, yielding 153.90 mg, yield:32%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm 7.21 (d, J=8.28 Hz, 2H) 7.08 (d, J=8.03Hz, 2H) 6.47 (d, J=8.53 Hz, 2H) 6.40-6.45 (m, 2H) 5.83 (br. s., 1H) 4.50(d, J=5.52 Hz, 2H) 4.23 (t, J=5.77 Hz, 2H) 4.04 (s, 8H) 2.86 (t, J=6.40Hz, 2H) 2.68 (q, J=7.53 Hz, 2H) 1.83-2.01 (m, 4H) 1.23 (t, J=7.53 Hz,3H)

Synthesis of Compound 7

Preparation of Intermediate R

Triphenylphosphine (1.89 g, 7.20 mmol), imidazole (735 mg, 10.8 mmol)and iodine (1.37 g, 5.40 mmol) were added to a solution of tert-butyl6-hydroxy-2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane-2-carboxylate (CAS [1147557-97-8], 768mg, 3.60 mmol) in toluene (50 mL). The resulting mixture was refluxedfor 1 hour. The mixture was cooled to 25° C., washed with water (100 mL)and brine (50 mL). The separated organic layer was dried, filtered andthe filtrate was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified byflash column chromatography over silica gel (eluent: petroleumether/ethyl acetate 1/0 to 1/1) to give intermediate R (1.20 g, yield:93%).

Preparation of Intermediate S

A mixture of 4-(Trifluoromethoxy)phenylboronic acid (CAS [139301-27-2],510 mg, 2.48 mmol), trans-2-amino-cyclohexanol (23.0 mg, 0.200 mmol) andnickel iodine (62.5 mg, 0.200 mmol) in isopropanol (4 mL) was stirred at25° C. for 30 minutes under nitrogen flow. NaHMDS (2.47 ml, 1 M in THF,2.47 mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred for 10 minutes undernitrogen flow. Intermediate R (400 mg, 1.24 mmol) in isopropanol (1 mL)was added and the mixture was stirred at 60° C. under microwave for 1hour, at 90° C. for 1 hour and at 120° C. for 5 hours. The mixture wasdiluted with dichloromethane (50 mL), washed with water (2×50 mL) andbrine (20 mL). The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, filteredand concentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified by columnchromatography over silica gel (eluent: petroleum ether/ethyl acetate5/1) to give intermediate S (230 mg, yield: 52%).

Preparation of Intermediate T

Intermediate S (220 mg, 0.616 mmol) was added to formic acid (5 mL) at0° C. under nitrogen atmosphere. The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 5hours. The mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue wasdissolved into dichloromethane (20 mL). The solution was washed withsaturated aqueous sodium carbonate solution (20 mL), brine (20 mL),dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under vacuum togive Intermediate T (150 mg, yield: 85%).

Preparation of Compound 7

A solution of intermediate T (110 mg, 0.428 mmol), Intermediate M (226mg, 0.514 mmol), Pd(dba)₂ (14.8 mg, 0.0260 mol), X-phos (20.4 mmol,0.0430 mmol) and sodium tert-butoxide (165 mg, 1.71 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane(5 mL) was irradiated under microwave at 100° C. for 1 h under N₂atmosphere. Ethyl acetate (30 mL) was added and the mixture was washedwith water (10 mL) and brine (20 mL). The organic layer was dried oversodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under vacuum. The residue waspurified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent: petroleumether/ethyl acetate 1/0 to 0/1) to give crude compound. It was furtherpurified by high performance liquid chromatography over PhenomenexGemini C18 200×25 mm×10 μm (eluent: 0.5% ammonia in water/acetonitrile80/20 to 14.5/85.5). The desired fractions were collected andlyophilized to give Compound 7 (84.60 mg, yield: 35%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ=9.52 (d, J=1.8 Hz, 1H), 7.53 (d, J=9.5 Hz,1H), 7.29 (dd, J=2.0, 9.5 Hz, 1H), 7.26-7.18 (m, 4H), 7.18-7.12 (m, 2H),6.47 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 5.99 (br.s., 1H), 4.58 (d, J=5.3 Hz, 2H), 4.02(s, 2H), 3.80 (s, 2H), 3.47 (q, J=8.9 Hz, 1H), 2.94 (q, J=7.5 Hz, 2H),2.70-2.61 (m, 2H), 2.38-2.29 (m, 2H), 1.38 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 8

Preparation of Intermediate U

Accordingly, intermediate U was prepared in the same way as intermediateH, starting from intermediate T and 4-iodobenzonitrile CAS [3058-39-7],yielding 120 mg, yield: 40%.

Preparation of Intermediate V

Accordingly, intermediate V was prepared in the same way as intermediateI, starting from intermediate U yielding 120 mg, yield: 92%.

Preparation of Compound 8

A mixture of intermediate V (125 mg, 0.222 mmol), intermediate L (80.5mg, 0.222 mmol), HATU (110 mg, 0.289 mmol) and DIEA (74.6 mg, 0.577mmol) in dichloromethane (10 mL) was stirred at 25° C. for 2 hours.Dichloromethane (50 mL) was added and the mixture was washed with water(50 mL) and brine (50 mL). The separated organic layer was dried oversodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under vacuum. The residue waspurified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent: ethylacetate) to give crude product. The crude product was further purifiedby high performance liquid chromatography over Gemini 150×25 5 μm(eluent: 0.05% ammonium water/acetonitrile 21/79). The desired fractionswere collected and lyophilized to give Compound 8 (36.6 mg, yield: 28%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ=9.83 (d, J=2.2 Hz, 1H), 8.55 (d, J=2.2 Hz,1H), 7.25-7.08 (m, 6H), 6.46 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 6.06 (br. s., 1H), 4.58(d, J=5.3 Hz, 2H), 4.02 (s, 2H), 3.81 (s, 2H), 3.47 (q, J=8.8 Hz, 1H),2.98 (q, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.73-2.59 (m, 2H), 2.41-2.27 (m, 2H), 1.42 (t,J=7.5 Hz, 3H).

Synthesis of Compound 9

Preparation of Intermediate W

Accordingly, intermediate W was prepared in the same way as intermediateH starting from intermediate AW (120 mg, 0.693 mmol) and4-iodobenzonitrile (CAS [3058-39-7], 238 mg, 1.04 mmol) yielding 100 mg,52%.

Preparation of Intermediate X

Accordingly, intermediate X was prepared in the same way as intermediateI starting from intermediate W (100 mg, 0.364 mmol yielding 100 mg, 94%.

Preparation of Compound 9

A solution of intermediate L (50.0 mg, 0.222 mmol), HATU (110 mg, 0.289mmol), DIEA (74.6 mg, 0.577 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was stirred for 30minutes at 25° C. Intermediate X (68.0 mg, 0.244 mmol) was added to themixture and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours at 25° C. The mixturewas concentrated under vacuum. The crude product was purified by highperformance liquid chromatography over Gemini (eluent: gradient 0.05%ammonia in water/methanol from 25/75 to 5/95). The desired fractionswere collected and concentrated to give Compound 9 (34.7 mg, yield:31%).

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm 9.82 (d, J=2.51 Hz, 1H) 8.55 (d, J=2.76Hz, 1H) 7.28-7.35 (m, 2H) 7.18-7.23 (m, 5H) 6.41-6.50 (m, 2H) 6.08 (t,J=5.02 Hz, 1H) 4.58 (d, J=5.52 Hz, 2H) 4.00-4.04 (m, 2H) 3.77-3.83 (m,2H) 3.42-3.53 (m, 1H) 2.98 (q, J=7.36 Hz, 2H) 2.62-2.69 (m, 2H)2.33-2.40 (m, 2H) 1.37-1.46 (m, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 10

Preparation of Intermediate Y

A mixture of 4-bromophenylsulfur pentafluoride (CAS [774-93-6] 4 g, 14.1mmol), bis(pinacolato)diboron (CAS [73183-34-3], 4.30 g, 16.9 mmol),potassium acetate (2.80 g, 28.5 mmol) and Pd(dppf)₂Cl₂ (0.946 g, 1.29mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (50 mL) was stirred at 100° C. for 16 hours. Ethylacetate (200 ml) was added and the mixture was washed with water (100mL) and brine (100 mL). The separated organic layer was dried oversodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under vacuum. The residue waspurified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent: petroleumether/ethyl acetate 10/1) to give intermediate Y (4.60 g, yield: 89%).

Preparation of Intermediate Z

Sodium periodate (3.49 g, 16.3 mmol) was added portionwise to a solutionof intermediate Y (1.80 g, 5.45 mmol) in concentrated hydrochloride (5mL) and THE (20 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at room temperaturefor 3 hours. Ethyl acetate (50 mL) was added and the mixture was washedwith saturated aqueous sodium sulfite solution (2×20 mL). The separatedorganic layer was washed with water (20 mL), brine (50 mL), dried oversodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under vacuum to giveintermediate Z (1 g, yield: 72%).).

Preparation of Intermediate AA

A mixture of intermediate Z (500 mg, 2.02 mmol),trans-3-amino-cyclohexanol (11.5 mg, 0.100 mmol) and nickel iodine (31.3mg, 0.100 mmol) in isopropanol (7 ml) was stirred at room temperaturefor 30 minutes under nitrogen flow. NaHMDS (2.02 ml, 2.02 mmol, 1 M inTHF) was added, and the mixture was stirred for 10 minutes undernitrogen flow. A solution of intermediate R (326 mg, 1.01 mmol) inisopropanol (3 ml) was added and the mixture was stirred at 60° C. undermicrowave for 1 hour, at 90° C. for 1 hour and at 120° C. for 4 hours.The mixture was diluted with dichloromethane (50 ml), washed with water(50 mL) and brine (50 mL). The organic layer was dried over sodiumsulfate, filtered and concentrated under vacuum. The residue waspurified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent: petroleumether/ethyl acetate 5/1) to give intermediate AA (170 mg, yield: 43%).

Preparation of Intermediate AB

Accordingly, intermediate AB was prepared in the same way asintermediate G, starting from intermediate AA (170 mg, 0.426 mmol)yielding 100 mg, 78%.

Preparation of Intermediate AC

Accordingly, intermediate AC was prepared in the same way asintermediate H, sarting from intermediate AB (80.0 mg, 0.267 mmol) and4-iodobenzonitrile (CAS [3058-39-7], 91.6 mg, 0.4 mmol) yielding 90 mg,71%.

Preparation of Intermediate AD

Accordingly, intermediate AD was prepared in the same way asintermediate I, starting from intermediate AC (80.0 mg, 0.200 mmol)yielding 80 mg, 99%.

Preparation of Compound 10

A mixture of 6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[3,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid(CAS [1216142-18-5], 44.5 mg, 0.198 mmol), intermediate AD (80 mg, 0.198mmol), HATU (97.9 mg, 0.257 mmol) and DIEA (76.8 mg, 0.594 mmol) in DMF(4 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The mixture waspurified by high performance liquid chromatography over Waters XbridgePrep OBD C18 150×30 5 μM (eluent: 0.05% ammonium water/methanol 15/85 to5/95). The desired fractions were collected and lyophilized to giveCompound 10 (36.6 mg, yield: 28%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ=9.52 (s, 1H), 7.69 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.54 (d,J=9.3 Hz, 1H), 7.34-7.27 (m, 2H), 7.23 (br. s., 3H), 6.47 (d, J=7.9 Hz,2H), 5.99 (br. s., 1H), 4.58 (d, J=4.4 Hz, 2H), 4.03 (s, 2H), 3.81 (s,2H), 3.52 (quin, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 2.94 (q, J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.69 (t, J=9.5Hz, 2H), 2.36 (t, J=10.1 Hz, 2H), 1.38 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 3H).

Synthesis of Compound 11

Preparation of Intermediate AE

A mixture of intermediate R (608 mg, 4.95 mmol),trans-2-amino-cyclohexanol (57.0 mg, 0.495 mmol) and NiI₂ (77.3 mg,0.248 mmol) in i-PrOH (6 mL) was stirred at 25° C. for 30 minutes undernitrogen flow. NaHMDS (908 mg, 4.95 mmol) was added, and the mixture wasstirred for 10 minutes under nitrogen flow. 3-Pyridineboronic acid (CAS[1692-25-7], 800 mg, 2.48 mmol) in i-PrOH (4 mL) was added and themixture was stirred at 60° C. under microwave for 1 hour, at 90° C. for1 hour and at 120° C. for 4 hours. The mixture was diluted withdichloromethane (50 mL), washed with water (50 mL) and brine (20 mL).The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered andconcentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified by columnchromatography over silica gel (eluent: petroleum ether/ethyl acetate 1)to give intermediate AE (250 mg, yield: 37%).

Preparation of Intermediate AF

Accordingly, intermediate AF was prepared in the same way asintermediate G, starting from intermediate AE (200 mg, 0.729 mmol)yielding 120 mg, 94%.

Preparation of Intermediate AG

Accordingly, intermediate AG was prepared in the same way asintermediate AG, starting from intermediate AF (80.0 mg, 0.459 mmol) and4-iodobenzonitrile (CAS [3058-39-7], 158 mg, 0.688 mmol) yielding 80.0mg, 63%.

Preparation of Intermediate AH

Accordingly, intermediate AH was prepared in the same way asintermediate I, starting from intermediate AG (70.0 mg, 0.254 mmol)yielding 70.0 mg, 99%.

Preparation of Compound 11

A solution of intermediate L (51.4 mg, 0.228 mmol), HATU (113 mg, 0.296mmol), DIEA (76.6 mg, 0.593 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) was stirred for 30minutes at 25° C. Intermediate AH (70.0 mg, 0.251 mmol) was added to themixture and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours at 25° C. The mixturewas concentrated under vacuum. The crude product was purified by highperformance liquid chromatography over Gemini (eluent: gradient 0.05%ammonia in water/methanol from 30/70 to 5/95). The desired fractionswere collected and concentrated to give Compound 11 (10.5 mg, yield:9%).

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm 9.83 (d, J=2.51 Hz, 1H) 8.55 (d, J=2.76Hz, 1H) 8.42-8.49 (m, 2H) 7.53 (d, J=7.78 Hz, 1H) 7.23 (d, J=8.53 Hz,3H) 6.47 (d, J=8.53 Hz, 2H) 6.06 (br. s., 1H) 4.58 (d, J=5.27 Hz, 2H)4.04 (s, 2H) 3.83 (s, 2H) 3.50 (q, J=8.72 Hz, 1H) 2.99 (q, J=7.53 Hz,2H) 2.65-2.74 (m, 2H) 2.33-2.43 (m, 2H) 1.42 (t, J=7.53 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 12 and Compound 13

A solution of 6-ethyl-2-methylimidazo[2,1-b]thiazole-5-carboxylic acid(CAS [1131613-58-5], 40 mg, 0.19 mmol),(4-{2-azaspiro[3.3]heptan-2-yl}phenyl)methanamine (CAS [1508720-12-4],46 mg, 0.23 mmol), EDCI.HCl (29 mg, 0.15 mmol), HOBt (26 mg, 0.19 mmol)and DIPEA (0.033 mL, 0.19 mmol) in dichloromethane (1.3 mL) and THE (1.3mL) was stirred at room temperature for 18 h. The mixture was extendedwith silica and evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified bypreparative LC (regular SiOH 30 μm, 12 g Interchim, dry loading, mobilephase gradient: heptane/EtOAc from 70/30 to 50/50) to give afterevaporation 41 mg of Compound 12 as a white solid (55%).

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 1.19 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 2H) 1.70-1.86 (m, 2H)2.15 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 4H) 2.42 (d, J=1.3 Hz, 3H) 2.84 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H)3.72 (s, 4H) 4.34 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 2H) 6.36 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H) 7.14 (d,J=8.5 Hz, 2H) 7.88 (d, J=1.3 Hz, 1H) 8.02 (br t, J=6.0 Hz, 1H).

Compound 13

Accordingly, Compound 13 was prepared as the same way as Compound 12starting from 2-bromo-6-methylimidazo[2,3-b][1,3]thiazole-5-carboxylicacid CAS [86933-04-2] and(4-{2-azaspiro[3.3]heptan-2-yl}phenyl)methanamine CAS [1508720-12-4],yielding 41 mg, 55%.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 1.19 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 2H) 1.70-1.86 (m, 2H)2.15 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 4H) 2.42 (d, J=1.3 Hz, 3H) 2.84 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H)3.72 (s, 4H) 4.34 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 2H) 6.36 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H) 7.14 (d,J=8.5 Hz, 2H) 7.88 (d, J=1.3 Hz, 1H) 8.02 (br t, J=6.0 Hz, 1H).

Synthesis of Compound 14

Preparation of Intermediate AI

Triethylamine (0.096 mL, 0.690 mmol), tert-butyl3-(aminomethyl)-2-oxa-9-azaspiro[5.5]undecane-9-carboxylate (CAS[1160246-99-0], 100 mg, 0.352 mmol), HOBT (46.6 mg, 0.345 mmol) andEDCI.HCl (99.3 mg, 0.518 mmol) were added to a solution of6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[3,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid (CAS[1216142-18-5], 77.5 mg, 0.345 mmol) in dichloromethane (2 mL) in turn.After stirred at 60° C. for 16 hours, ethyl acetate (20 mL) was added.The mixture was washed with water (2×20 mL) and brine (20 mL). Theseparated organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and thefiltrate was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified bycolumn chromatography over silica gel (eluent: petroleum ether/ethylacetate 1/1 to 0/1) to give intermediate AI (160 mg, Yield: 86%).

Preparation of Intermediate AJ

Hydrochloride (2 mL, 8 mmol, 2 M in dioxane) was added to a solution ofintermediate AI (120 mg, 0.244 mmol) in dichloromethane (2 mL) at 0° C.After stirred at 15° C. for 12 hours, the solvent was evaporated undervacuum. The residue was dissolved into water (20 mL) and then basifiedwith saturated aqueous sodium carbonate to pH˜10. The solution wasextracted with dichloromethane/methanol (10/1, 2×20 mL). The combinedorganic layers were washed with brine (20 mL), dried over sodiumsulfate, filtered and the filtrated was concentrated under vacuum togive intermediate AJ (50 mg, yield: 56%).

Preparation of Compound 14

A solution of intermediate AJ (30.0 mg, 0.0770 mmol),1-iodo-4-(trifluoromethoxy) benzene (CAS [103962-05-6], 22.2 mg, 0.0770mmol), Pd(dba)₂ (4.60 mg, 8.00 μmol, X-phos (7.63 mg, 16.0 μmol) andsodium tert-butoxide (29.6 mg, 0.308 mmol) in dioxane (4 mL) wasirradiated under microwave at 110° C. for 1 h under N₂ atmosphere. Themixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated under reducedpressure. The residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate, washed with water,brine, dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated to dryness underreduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography oversilica gel (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate 10/1 to 0/1) to give crudecompound. It was further purified by high performance liquidchromatography over Gemini C18 150×25 mm×10 μl (eluent: 0.5% ammonia inwater/acetonitrile 45/55 to 15/85). The desired fractions were collectedand lyophilized to give Compound 14 (1.30 mg, yield: 3%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ=9.50 (d, J=1.3 Hz, 1H), 7.54 (d, J=9.5 Hz,1H), 7.29 (dd, J=2.1, 9.4 Hz, 1H), 7.10 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 6.89 (d,J=9.3 Hz, 2H), 6.35 (br. s., 1H), 3.93-3.85 (m, 2H), 3.51 (br. s., 1H),3.30 (m, 1H), 3.24 (d, J=11.3 Hz, 1H), 3.21-3.07 (m, 4H), 3.03 (q, J=7.5Hz, 2H), 1.94-1.85 (m, 2H), 1.79 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 1.66-1.62 (m, 1H),1.61-1.59 (m, 2H), 1.50-1.47 (m, 2H), 1.44 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 15

Preparation of Intermediate AK

Sodium tert-butoxide (481 mg, 5.01 mmol) in dimethoxyethane (5 mL) andbutanol (5 mL) was added to a solution of7-Boc-7-azaspiro[3.5]nonan-2-one (CAS [203661-69-2], 600 mg, 2.51 mmol)and Tosmic (548 mg, 2.81 mmol) in dimethoxyethane (5 mL) under nitrogenatmosphere at 10 to 15° C. over 1 hour. After stirring of the mixture at20° C. for 12 hours, the reaction mixture was poured into ice water, andthen extracted with ethyl acetate. The extract was washed with brine,dried, and evaporated. The residue was purified by column chromatographyover silica gel (20% ethyl acetate-hexane) to give intermediate AK (50.0mg, yield: 8%).

Preparation of Intermediate AL

A solution of intermediate AK (50 mg, 0.200 mmol) in NH₃·MeOH (7 M inmethanol, 10 mL) was hydrogenated at 15° C. (H₂, 15 psi) with RaneyNickel (25 mg) as a catalyst for 16 hours. The catalyst was filtered offand the filtrate was concentrated under vacuum to give intermediate AL(50.9 mg, Yield: 95%).

Preparation of Intermediate AM

A solution of intermediate AL (44.9 mg, 0.200),6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[3,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid (CAS[1216142-18-5], 50.9 mg, 0.200 mmol), HOBt (27.0 mg, 0.200 mmol), EDCI(57.5 mg, 0.300 mmol) and triethylamine (0.056 ml, 0.400 mmol) in DMF (2ml) was stirred at 60° C. for 16 hours. Ethyl acetate (20 mL) was addedand the mixture was washed with brine, dried, filtered and the filtratewas concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography oversilica gel (petroleum/ethyl acetate 1/1) to give intermediate AM (50.0mg, yield: 51%).

Preparation of Intermediate AN

Hydrochloride (1.00 mL, 4.00 mmol, 4 M in ethyl acetate) was added to asolution of intermediate AM (50.0 mg, 0.108 mmol) in C at 0° C. Themixture was warmed up to 20° C. and stirred for 16 hours. The mixturewas neutralized with saturated sodium carbonate to pH˜10 and dilutedwith ethyl acetate (10 mL). The organic layer was washed with brine (10mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under vacuum.The residue was purified by thin layer chromatography over silica gel(eluent: dichloromethane/methanol 10/1) to give intermediate AN (35.0mg, yield: 81%).

Preparation of Compound 15

A solution of intermediate AN (15.0 mg, 0.0420 mmol),1-iodo-4-(trifluoromethoxy) benzene (CAS [103962-05-6], 12.1 mg, 0.042mmol), Pd(dba)₂ (3.66 mg, 6.37 μmol), X-phos (3.81 mg, 8.00 mmol) andsodium tert-butoxide (16.1 mg, 0.168 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (2 mL) wasirradiated under microwave at 110° C. for 60 min under N2 atmosphere.The mixture was filtered and then the filtrate was concentrated underreduced pressure. The residue was purified by column chromatography oversilica gel (eluent: petroleum ether/ethyl acetate 1/1) to give crudecompound. It was further purified by high performance liquidchromatography over Gemini C18 150×25 mm×10 μl (eluent: ammonia inwater/acetonitrile 30/70 to 0/100). The desired fractions were collectedand lyophilized to give Compound 15 (2.30 mg, yield: 10%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ=9.47 (s, 1H), 7.54 (d, J=9.5 Hz, 1H), 7.29(dd, J=2.0, 9.5 Hz, 1H), 7.08 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 2H), 6.89 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 2H),5.80 (br. s., 1H), 3.57 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 3.17-3.09 (m, 2H), 3.09-3.03(m, 2H), 3.00 (q, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.61 (td, J=8.3, 16.1 Hz, 1H),2.11-1.99 (m, 2H), 1.83-1.75 (m, 2H), 1.71 (d, J=5.5 Hz, 2H), 1.60-1.54(m, 2H), 1.45 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 16, Compound 17, Compound 18 and Compound 19

Preparation of Intermediate AO

DAST (0.507 mL, 3.84 mmol) was added dropwise to a solution oftert-butyl 6-hydroxy-2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane-2-carboxylate (CAS[63711570], 700 mg, 3.28 mmol) in dry dichloromethane (5 mL) undernitrogen atmosphere at 0° C. The mixture was slowly warmed up to 40° C.and stirred overnight. The resulting mixture was washed with water andbrine. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered andconcentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified by columnchromatography over silica gel to give intermediate AO (200 mg, yield:27%).

Preparation of Intermediate AP

A mixture of intermediate AO (200 mg, 0.929 mmol) in formic acid (5 mL)was stirred at 25° C. for 16 hours. The mixture was concentrated undervacuum to give intermediate AP (149 mg, yield: 100%).

Preparation of Compound 16

A solution of intermediate AP (59.4 mg, 0.369 mmol), intermediate M (195mg, 0.443 mmol), Pd(dba)₂ (21.2 mg, 0.037 mmol), X-phos (35.2 mg, 0.074mmol) and sodium tert-butoxide (177 mg, 1.85 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (8 ml)was irradiated under microwave at 110° C. for 60 min under N₂.Dichloromethane (50 mL) was added and the mixture was washed with water(50 mL) and brine (50 mL). The organic layer was dried over sodiumsulfate, filtered and the filtrate was concentrated under vacuum. Theresidue was purified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent:petroleum ether/ethyl acetate 1/0 to 0/1). The desired fractions werecollected and concentrated. The residue was further purified by highperformance liquid chromatography over Waters Xbridge C18 150×20 mm×5 μm(eluent: 0.5% NH₃ water/methanol 35/65 to 5/95). The desired fractionswere collected and lyophilized to give Compound 16 (33.30 mg, yield:21%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ=9.52 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.53 (d, J=9.5 Hz,1H), 7.29 (dd, J=2.1, 9.4 Hz, 1H), 7.22 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 2H), 6.43 (d,J=8.3 Hz, 2H), 5.99 (br. s., 1H), 5.10-4.85 (m, 1H), 4.57 (d, J=5.4 Hz,2H), 3.87 (d, J=16.4 Hz, 4H), 2.94 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.71-2.59 (m, 2H),2.52-2.36 (m, 2H), 1.38 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H).

Preparation of Intermediate AQ

A solution of intermediate AP (400 mg, 3.47 mmol), 4-iodobenzonitrile(1.19 g, 5.21 mmol), X-phos (199 mg, 0.42 mmol), Pd(dba)₂ (120 mg, 0.208mmol) and t-BuONa (1.34 g, 13.9 mmol) in dioxane (20 mL) was irradiatedunder microwave at 110° C. for 1 hour under N₂. The mixture wasconcentrated. The crude product was purified by column chromatographyover silica gel (eluent: ethyl acetate/petroleum ether from 0 to 1/5).The desired fractions were collected and concentrated to giveintermediate AQ (450 mg, yield: 60%).

Preparation of Intermediate AR

A mixture of intermediate AQ (450 mg, 2.08 mmol) in NH₃·MeOH (7M inmethanol, 20 mL) was hydrogenated (15 psi) with Raney Nickel (50 mg) ascatalyst at 25° C. for 16 hours. After uptake of H₂, the catalyst wasfiltered off and the filtrate was concentrated to give intermediate AR(450 mg, yield: 98%).

Preparation of Compound 17

Accordingly, Compound 17 was prepared as the same way as Compound 11,starting from intermediate AR and intermediate L, yielding 5.20 mg,yield: 3%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm 9.82 (d, J=2.51 Hz, 1H) 8.55 (d, J=2.51Hz, 1H) 7.21 (d, J=8.28 Hz, 2H) 6.43 (d, J=8.53 Hz, 2H) 6.05 (br. s.,1H) 5.05-4.9 (m, 1H) 4.57 (d, J=5.52 Hz, 2H) 3.89 (s, 2H) 3.85 (s, 2H)2.98 (q, J=7.53 Hz, 2H) 2.61-2.69 (m, 2H) 2.38-2.50 (m, 2H) 1.42 (t,J=7.53 Hz, 3H)

Preparation of Compound 18

Accordingly, Compound 18 was prepared as the same way as Compound 11,starting from intermediate AR and6-ethyl-2-methylimidazo[2,1-b]thiazole-5-carboxylic acidCAS[1131613-58-5], yielding 41.8 mg, yield: 27%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm 7.99 (d, J=1.26 Hz, 1H) 7.20 (d, J=8.28Hz, 2H) 6.40-6.45 (m, 2H) 5.84 (br. s., 1H) 5.05-4.9 (m, 1H) 4.54 (s,2H) 3.88 (s, 2H) 3.84 (s, 2H) 2.82 (q, J=7.70 Hz, 2H) 2.60-2.70 (m, 2H)2.37-2.52 (m, 5H) 1.29-1.36 (m, 3H).

Preparation of Compound 19

Accordingly, Compound 19 was prepared as the same way as Compound 11,starting from intermediate AR and2-ethyl-5H,6H,7H,8H-imidazo[1,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid CAS[1529528-99-1], yielding 32.0 mg, yield: 21.5%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm 7.18 (d, J=8.28 Hz, 2H) 6.41 (d, J=8.53Hz, 2H) 5.81 (br. s., 1H) 4.86-5.10 (m, 1H) 4.48 (d, J=5.52 Hz, 2H) 4.22(t, J=5.90 Hz, 2H) 3.88 (s, 2H) 3.84 (s, 2H) 2.85 (t, J=6.40 Hz, 2H)2.60-2.70 (m, 4H) 2.37-2.51 (m, 2H) 1.83-1.99 (m, 4H) 1.22 (t, J=7.65Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 20 and Compound 21

Preparation of Intermediate AS

TFA (1.6 mL, 21 mmol) was added to a solution of tert-butyl6-oxo-2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane-2-carboxylate (CAS [1181816-12-5], 0.3 g,1.4 mmol) in dichloromethane (9.8 mL) and the mixture was stirred atroom temperature for 18 h. The reaction mixture was evaporated undervacuum, and coevaporated twice with toluene to afford 320 mg ofIntermediate AS as a colorless oil (100%).

Preparation of Intermediate AT

A solution of intermediate AS (0.34 g, 1.5 mmol), 4-fluorobenzonitrile(CAS [1194-02-1], 0.37 g, 3.0 mmol) and K₂CO₃ (0.62 g, 4.5 mmol) in DMSO(5.4 mL) was heated at 120° C. using a single mode microwave (Biotageinitiator60) with a power output ranging from 0 to 400 W for 30 min.Brine and EtOAc were added. The organic layer was extracted, dried overMgSO4, filtered and evaporated. Purification of the residue was carriedout by preparative LC (Interchim, 12 g, 30 μm, Heptane/EtOAc 90/10).Pure fractions were collected and evaporated to give 60 mg ofintermediate AT as a white solid (19%).

Preparation of Intermediate AU

A solution of intermediate AT (60 mg, 0.28 mmol) in dry THE (1.1 mL) wasadded dropwise to a mixture of LiAlH₄ (64 mg, 1.7 mmol) in dry THE (1.2mL) at 0° C. The mixture was slowly let come back to room temperatureand stirred overnight. Water (0.24 mL) then dichloromethane (30 mL) wereadded very slowly and stirred for 20 min. MgSO₄ was added, the insolublewas filtered on a pad of celite, and the filtrate was evaporated untildryness to give 57 mg of intermediate AU as a white solid (92%).

Preparation of Compound 20

A solution of 6-ethyl-2-methylimidazo[2,1-b]thiazole-5-carboxylic acid(CAS [1131613-58-5], 46 mg, 0.22 mmol), intermediate AU (57 mg, 0.26mmol), EDCI.HCl (34 mg, 0.22 mmol), HOBt (29 mg, 0.22 mmol) and DIPEA(0.038 mL, 0.22 mmol) in dichloromethane (1.5 mL) and THF (1.5 mL) wasstirred at room temperature for 18 h. The mixture was extended withsilica and evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by preparativeLC (regular SiOH 30 μm, 12 g, dry loading, mobile phase gradient:DCM/MeOH from 99/1 to 96/4) to give after evaporation, trituration inEt₂O and a second evaporation, 53 mg of Compound 20 as a beige solid(59%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 1.19 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H) 1.89-2.02 (m, 2H)2.38-2.45 (m, 2H) 2.41 (s, 3H) 2.83 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H) 3.67 (s, 2H) 3.72(s, 2H) 3.90-4.08 (m, 1H) 4.34 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H) 5.01 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H)6.34 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H) 7.13 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 2H) 7.87 (d, J=1.0 Hz, 1H)7.99 (t, J=6.1 Hz, 1H).

Preparation of Compound 21

Under nitrogen, DMP (15%) in dichloromethane (0.20 mL, 94 μmol) wasadded to a solution of Compound 20 (35 mg, 85 μmol) in dichloromethane(2.7 mL) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 72 h. Themixture was extended with silica and evaporated in vacuo. The residuewas purified by preparative LC (regular SiOH 30 μm, 12 g, dry loading,mobile phase gradient: DCM/MeOH from 99/1 to 97/3) to give afterevaporation, trituration in Et₂O and evaporation, 18 mg of a beigesolid. This solid was purified via Reverse phase (Stationary phase:X-Bridge-C18 5 μm 30*150 mm, Mobile phase: Gradient from 75% aq. NH₄HCO₃(0.5%), 25% MeCN to 35% aq. NH₄HCO₃ (0.5%), 65% MeCN) to give 5 mg ofCompound 21 as a beige solid (14%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 1.19 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H) 2.41 (s, 3H) 2.84(q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H) 3.32 (s, 4H) 3.95 (s, 4H) 4.35 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H) 6.43(d, J=8.1 Hz, 2H) 7.17 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H) 7.88 (s, 1H) 8.02 (t, J=5.6 Hz,1H).

Synthesis of Compound 23 and Compound 22

Preparation of Intermediate AV

Accordingly, intermediate AV was prepared in the same way asintermediate S, starting from intermediate R and Phenylboronic acid CAS[98-80-6], yielding 0.3 g, 62%.

Preparation of Intermediate AW

Accordingly, intermediate AW was prepared in the same way asintermediate T, starting from intermediate AV, yielding 0.27 g, 99%.

Preparation of Compound 22 and Compound 23

Accordingly, Compound 22 was prepared in the same way as Compound 7starting from intermediate AW and intermediate M. Yielding Compound 22,0.031 g, 16% and Compound 23, as by product, 0.0071 g, 13%.

Compound 22 ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) 6=9.53 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H),7.57-7.49 (m, 1H), 7.28 (d, J=2.3 Hz, 3H), 7.24 (s, 1H), 7.23-7.17 (m,4H), 6.47 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 2H), 5.98 (br. s., 1H), 4.58 (d, J=5.5 Hz, 2H),4.02 (s, 2H), 3.81 (s, 2H), 3.48 (quin, J=8.9 Hz, 1H), 2.94 (q, J=7.5Hz, 2H), 2.69-2.60 (m, 2H), 2.41-2.32 (m, 2H), 1.38 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 3H).

Compound 23 ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 9.40 (d, J=7.28 Hz, 1H)7.60 (d, J=9.03 Hz, 1H) 7.34-7.31 (m, 3H) 7.29-7.20 (m, 5H) 6.88-6.95(m, 1H) 6.47 (d, J=8.28 Hz, 2H) 5.97 (br. s., 1H) 4.59 (d, J=5.27 Hz,2H) 4.02 (s, 2H) 3.81 (s, 2H) 3.38-3.54 (m, 1H) 2.96 (q, J=7.61 Hz, 2H)2.59-2.74 (m, 2H) 2.31-2.42 (m, 2H) 1.39 (t, J=7.53 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 24

Preparation of intermediate AX

A mixture of 6-methylimidazo[2,1-B][1,3]thiazole-5-carboxylic acid (CAS[77628-51-4], 200 mg, 1.10 mmol), 4-iodobenzenemethanamine (CAS[39959-59-6], 256 mg, 1.10 mmol), HATU (544 mg, 1.43 mmol), anddiisopropylethylamine (425 mg, 3.29 mmol) in dichloromethane (5 ml) wasstirred at 25° C. for 2 hours. The mixture was diluted withdichloromethane (100 ml). The solution was washed with water (50 mL),brine (50 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentratedunder vacuum. The residue was purified by column chromatography oversilica gel (eluent: petroleum ether/ethyl acetate 0/1) to giveintermediate AX (220 mg, yield: 47.3%).

Preparation of Compound 24

Accordingly, Compound 24 was prepared in the same way as Compound 7starting from intermediate AX and intermediate T, yielding 0.029 g, 17%.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 8.29 (d, J=4.5 Hz, 1H), 7.24-7.18(m, 4H), 7.18-7.13 (m, 2H), 6.88 (d, J=4.5 Hz, 1H), 6.46 (d, J=8.5 Hz,2H), 5.85 (br. s., 1H), 4.56 (d, J=5.5 Hz, 2H), 4.02 (s, 2H), 3.80 (s,2H), 3.47 (quin, J=8.9 Hz, 1H), 2.70-2.61 (m, 2H), 2.56 (s, 3H),2.38-2.29 (m, 2H)

Synthesis of Compound 25 and Compound 26

Preparation of Intermediate AY

A mixture of 2-chloro-6-quinolinecarbonitrile (CAS [78060-54-5], 14.7mg, 0.078 mmol), Intermediate T (20.0 mg, 0.078 mmol) and potassiumcarbonate (21.6 mg, 0.156 mmol) in acetonitrile (5 mL) was refluxed for16 hours. The solvent was evaporated under vacuum. The residue waspurified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent: petroleumether/ethyl acetate 1/1) to give intermediate AY (20.0 mg, yield:62.8%).

Preparation of Intermediate AZ

A solution of intermediate AY (20.0 mg, 0.049 mmol) in NH₃·MeOH (20 mL,7 M NH₃ in MeOH) was hydrogenated at 15° C. (15 psi) with Raney nickel(3 mg) as a catalyst for 16 hours. The catalyst was filtered off and thefiltrate was concentrated under vacuum to give intermediate AZ (20.0 mg,yield: 91.84%).

Preparation of Compound 26

A solution of 6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[3,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid(CAS [1216142-18-5], 9.79 mg, 0.044 mmol), HATU (21.7 mg, 0.057 mmol),DIEA (14.8 mg, 0.114 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (10 mL) was stirred for 30 minutesat 25° C. Intermediate AZ (20 mg, 0.048 mmol) was added to the mixtureand the mixture was stirred for 2 hours at 25° C.

The mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The crude product waspurified by high performance liquid chromatography over Gemini (eluent:0.05% ammonia in water/methanol 35/65 to 5/95). The desired fractionswere collected and concentrated to give Compound 26 (4.30 mg, 15.91%).

1H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 9.56 (s, 1H) 7.84 (d, J=8.80 Hz,1H) 7.74 (d, J=8.56 Hz, 1H) 7.59 (s, 1H) 7.55 (d, J=9.29 Hz, 2H) 7.31(d, J=9.78 Hz, 1H) 7.22 (d, J=8.40 Hz, 2H) 7.16 (d, J=8.40 Hz, 2H) 6.59(d, J=9.05 Hz, 1H) 6.13 (br. s., 1H) 4.79 (d, J=5.62 Hz, 2H) 4.33 (s,2H) 4.11 (s, 2H) 3.50 (t, J=8.68 Hz, 1H) 2.97 (q, J=7.42 Hz, 2H)2.65-2.76 (m, 2H) 2.33-2.44 (m, 2H) 1.38 (t, J=7.58 Hz, 3H)

Preparation of Compound 25

Accordingly, Compound 25 was prepared in the same way as Compound 26starting from intermediate L and intermediate AZ, yielding 0.037 g, 25%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 9.83 (d, J=2.51 Hz, 1H) 8.55 (d,J=2.51 Hz, 1H) 7.83 (d, J=8.78 Hz, 1H) 7.75 (d, J=8.53 Hz, 1H) 7.55 (d,J=9.20 Hz, 1H) 7.53 (d, J=6.80 Hz, 1H) 7.22 (d, J=8.80 Hz, 2H) 7.15 (d,J=8.40 Hz, 2H) 6.58 (d, J=8.78 Hz, 1H) 6.26 (t, J=5.27 Hz, 1H) 4.77 (d,J=5.60 Hz, 2H) 4.33 (s, 2H) 4.11 (s, 2H) 3.50 (quin, J=8.85 Hz, 1H) 3.01(q, J=7.53 Hz, 2H) 2.65-2.74 (m, 2H) 2.33-2.43 (m, 2H) 1.41 (t, J=7.53Hz, 3H)

The following compounds were also prepared in accordance with theprocedures described herein:

Compound No Structure 27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

Synthesis of Compound 56

To a solution of 5-methoxy-2-methylpyrazolo[1,5-a]pyridine-3-carboxylicacid (CAS [1352395-28-8], 0.055 g mg, 0.26 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was addedintermediate I (0.08 g, 0.22 mmol), HATU (0.1 g, 0.26 mmol) anddiisopropylethylamine (0.085 g, 0.66 mmol). The mixture was stirred atroom temperature overnight. The solvent was removed in vacuum todryness. The residue was purified by high performance liquidchromatography (Waters Xbridge Prep OBD C18 150×30×5μ, 25 mL/min,gradient water (containing 0.05% NH₃·H₂O)/Acetonitrile from 85/15 to55/45). The desired fraction was collected and evaporated to remove offacetonitrile in vacuum. The residue was lyophilized to give Compound 56,0.027 g, 21%.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ=8.19 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.57 (d, J=2.2 Hz,1H), 7.34 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 7.21 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 7.07 (d, J=8.4 Hz,2H), 6.54 (dd, J=2.4, 7.3 Hz, 1H), 6.40 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 5.96 (br. s.,1H), 4.67 (d, J=5.3 Hz, 2H), 4.01 (s, 2H), 3.91 (s, 3H), 3.80 (s, 2H),3.51-3.44 (m, 1H), 2.70-2.56 (m, 5H), 2.41-2.30 (m, 2H).

Synthesis of Compound 57

Accordingly, Compound 57 was prepared in the same way as Compound 56starting from 5-methoxy-2-methylpyrazolo[1,5-a]pyridine-3-carboxylicacid CAS [1352395-28-8], and intermediate Q, yielding 0.027 g, 21%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ=8.18 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.57 (d, J=2.6 Hz,1H), 7.25 (br. s., 2H), 7.09 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.53 (dd, J=2.6, 7.5 Hz,1H), 6.49 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 6.43 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 5.86 (br. s., 1H),4.59 (d, J=5.3 Hz, 2H), 4.04 (s, 8H), 3.91 (s, 3H), 2.58 (s, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 58

Preparation of Intermediate BA

A mixture of 2-Amino-5-chloropyrazine (CAS [33332-29-5], 6 g, 46.31mmol) and intermediate J (14.52 g, 69.47 mmol) in EtOH (10 mL) wasstirred at 100° C. for 12 h. The solvent was removed in vacuum. Theresidue was purified by column chromatography (petroleum ether/ethylacetate=5/1). The product fractions were collected and the solvent wasevaporated to give intermediate BA, 0.81 g, 7%.

Preparation of Intermediate BB

To a solution of intermediate BA (0.8 g, 3.34 mmol) in MeOH (30 mL) andwater (6 mL) was added lithium hydroxide monohydrate (0.7 g, 16.69mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 10 h. The solventwas removed in vacuum. The mixture was acidified with aqueous HCl 2N (5mL) to pH=3˜4. The resulting white precipitates were filtered, andwashed with water (20 mL) to afford intermediate BB, 0.65 g, 86%.

Preparation of Compound 58

Accordingly, Compound 58 was prepared in the same way as Compound 56starting from intermediate BB1 and intermediate Q, yielding 0.05 g, 29%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ=9.41 (s, 1H), 8.90 (s, 1H), 7.24 (d, J=7.9 Hz,2H), 7.08 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 6.49 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 6.42 (d, J=8.8 Hz,2H), 6.10 (br. s., 1H), 4.60 (d, J=5.3 Hz, 2H), 4.04 (d, J=3.5 Hz, 8H),3.00 (q, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 1.42 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 59

Preparation of Intermediate BC

Sodium borohydride (2.13 g, 56.41 mmol) was added to a solution of7-Boc-7-azaspiro[3.5]nonan-2-one (CAS [203661-69-2], 2.5 g, 10.45 mmol)in MeOH (30 mL). The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 16 hours. Themixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was diluted withethyl acetate (50 mL), washed with water (2×50 mL) and brine (50 mL).The separated organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate andconcentrated under vacuum to give intermediate BC, 2.5 g, 99%.

Preparation of Intermediate BD

A solution HCl 4M in EtOAc (5.18 mL, 20.72 mmol) was added to a solutionof intermediate BC (2.5 g, 10.36 mmo) in CH₂Cl₂ (100 mL) at 0° C. Thesolution was stirred at room temperature overnight. The solvent wasconcentrated under vacuum affording intermediate BD as an hydrochloridesalt, 1.84 g, 100%.

Preparation of Intermediate BE

To a solution of 1-iodo-4-(trifluoromethoxy)benzene (CAS [103962-05-6],4.48 g, 15.54 mmol) in DMSO (50 mL) was added intermediate BD (1.84 g,10.36 mmol), cesium carbonate (8.44 g, 25.9 mmol), L-Proline (0.48 g,4.14 mmol) and copper iodide (0.39 g, 2.07 mmol). The mixture was heatedat 90° C. for 18 h under argon atmosphere. The mixture was diluted withwater (100 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (50 mL×3). The organiclayer was washed with brine (50 mL), dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered andconcentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by columnchromatography (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate=4/1) to give intermediateBE, 1.5 g, 48%.

Preparation of Intermediate BF

Methanesulfonyl chloride (0.77 mL, 9.96 mmol) was added to a solution ofintermediate BE (1.5 g, 4.98 mmol) and triethylamine (2.78 mL, 19.91mmol) in CH₂C₂ (20 mL). The reaction solution was stirred at roomtemperature overnight. The mixture was washed with water (100 mL) andconcentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified by columnchromatography over silica gel (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate 4/1). Purefractions were collected and evaporated to give intermediate BF, 1.6 g,85%.

Preparation of Intermediate BG

A mixture of intermediate BF (1.6 g, 4.22 mmol), sodium cyanide (0.83 g,16.87 mmol) and tetrabutylammonium bromide (0.82 g, 2.53 mmol) in DMF(30 mL) was stirred at 120° C. for 10 h. The mixture was diluted withwater (200 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (200 mL×3). The organiclayers were washed with brine (200 mL), dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered andconcentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by columnchromatography over silica gel (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate 4/1). Theproduct fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporatedaffording intermediate BG, 1.3 g, 99%.

Preparation of Intermediate BH

A mixture of intermediate BG (1.3 g, 4.19 mmol) in NH₃·MeOH (7M inmethanol, 20 mL) was hydrogenated (15 psi) with Raney Nickel (1 g) ascatalyst at 25° C. for 16 hours. After uptake of H₂, the catalyst wasfiltered off and the filtrate was concentrated to give intermediate BH,1.3 g, 99%.

Preparation of Compound 59

Accordingly, Compound 59 was prepared in the same way as Compound 56starting from 5-methoxy-2-methylpyrazol[1,5-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acidCAS [1352395-28-8] and intermediate BH, yielding 0.048 g, 36%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ=8.18 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.54 (d, J=2.6 Hz,1H), 7.08 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.88 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.53 (dd, J=2.6,7.5 Hz, 1H), 5.66 (br. s., 1H), 3.90 (s, 3H), 3.53 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 2H),3.16-3.09 (m, 2H), 3.08-3.02 (m, 2H), 2.63-2.60 (m, 3H), 2.04 (t, J=10.4Hz, 2H), 1.81-1.75 (m, 2H), 1.72-1.66 (m, 2H), 1.62 (br. s., 2H)

Synthesis of Compound 60

Accordingly, Compound 60 was prepared in the same way as Compound 59starting from intermediate L and intermediate BH, yielding 0.075 g, 45%.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ=9.79 (d, J=2.2 Hz, 1H), 8.56 (d, J=2.2 Hz,1H), 7.09 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.89 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 5.86 (br. s., 1H),3.57 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 2H), 3.17-3.11 (m, 2H), 3.10-3.00 (m, 4H), 2.61 (td,J=8.0, 16.2 Hz, 1H), 2.11-2.01 (m, 2H), 1.83-1.77 (m, 2H), 1.75-1.68 (m,2H), 1.64 (m, 2H), 1.49 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 3H).

Synthesis of Compound 61

Accordingly, Compound 61 was prepared in the same way as Compound 59starting from 2-ethyl-5H,6H,7H,8H-imidazo[1,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylicacid CAS [1529528-99-1] and intermediate BH, yielding 0.082 g, 65%.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ=7.09 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 6.96-6.85 (m, 2H),5.64 (br. s., 1H), 4.20 (t, J=5.9 Hz, 2H), 3.47 (dd, J=5.8, 7.3 Hz, 2H),3.16-3.09 (m, 2H), 3.08-3.02 (m, 2H), 2.86 (t, J=6.3 Hz, 2H), 2.73 (q,J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.55 (td, J=7.9, 16.0 Hz, 1H), 2.05-1.98 (m, 2H),1.97-1.85 (m, 4H), 1.82-1.74 (m, 2H), 1.71-1.67 (m, 2H), 1.61-1.52 (m,2H), 1.30 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 3H).

Synthesis of Compound 62

Preparation of Intermediate BI

LiHMDS (19.27 mL, 19.27 mmol) was added to a mixture ofDiethylcyanomethyl phosphonate (3.41 g, 19.27 mmol) in THE (180 mL) at−70° C. under N₂ flow. The mixture was stirred for 10 minutes.1-[4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]-4-piperidinone (CAS [681508-68-9], 4.5 g,17.36 mmol) was added to the mixture at −78° C. The mixture was stirredfor 1 hour at −78° C. The mixture was quenched with NH₄Cl solution,extracted with ethyl acetate (300 mL), washed with brine (200 mL), driedover MgSO₄ and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated. The crudeproduct was purified by column chromatography over silica gel (ethylacetate/petroleum ether from 0 to 1/3). The desired fractions werecollected and concentrated to give intermediate BI, 7.8 g, 72%.

Preparation of Intermediate BJ

Trimethylsulfoxonium iodide (5.83 g, 26.5 mmol) was added slowly to asolution of potassium tert-butoxide (2.97 g, 26.5 mmol) in DMSO (50 mL).The mixture was stirred for 1.5 hours at room temperature. A solution ofintermediate BI (6.8 g, 24.09 mmol) in DMSO (50 mL) was added to themixture. The mixture was stirred 24 hours at 45° C. Saturated NH₄Clsolution was added to the mixture and stirred for 0.5 hours. The mixturewas extracted with ethyl acetate (100 mL). The organic layer was washedwith brine (70 mL), dried over MgSO₄ and filtered. The filtrate wasconcentrated. The crude product was purified by column chromatographyover silica gel (ethyl acetate/petroleum ether from 0 to 1/3). Thedesired fractions were collected and concentrated to give intermediateBJ, 4.5 g, 63%.

Preparation of Intermediate BK

Accordingly intermediate BK was prepared by the same way as intermediateBH, starting from intermediate BJ affording, 0.18 g,

Preparation of Compound 62

Accordingly, Compound 62 was prepared in the same way as Compound 56starting from 5-methoxy-2-methylpyrazolo[,5-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acidCAS [1352395-28-8] and intermediate BK, yielding 0.04 g, 9%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ=8.18 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 7.53 (d, J=2.2 Hz,1H), 7.10 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.91 (d, J=9.3 Hz, 2H), 6.52 (dd, J=2.4,7.3 Hz, 1H), 5.73 (br. s., 1H), 3.89 (s, 3H), 3.60-3.48 (m, 2H), 3.34(t, J=13.0 Hz, 2H), 3.17-3.09 (m, 2H), 2.63 (s, 3H), 1.93-1.84 (m, 1H),1.80-1.73 (m, 1H), 1.66-1.58 (m, 1H), 1.42-1.34 (m, 1H), 1.10-1.00 (m,1H), 0.67 (dd, J=4.6, 8.2 Hz, 1H), 0.36 (t, J=4.9 Hz, 1H)

Synthesis of Compound 63

Accordingly, Compound 63 was prepared in the same way as Compound 62starting from intermediate L and intermediate BK, yielding 0.019 g, 16%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm 9.78 (d, J=2.76 Hz, 1H) 8.56 (d, J=2.76Hz, 1H) 7.11 (d, J=8.28 Hz, 2H) 6.86-6.96 (m, 2H) 5.92 (br. s., 1H) 3.57(dd, J=7.65, 5.40 Hz, 2H) 3.30-3.43 (m, 2H) 3.09-3.17 (m, 2H) 3.06 (q,J=7.53 Hz, 2H) 1.90 (ddd, J=12.92, 9.16, 3.26 Hz, 1H) 1.74-1.83 (m, 1H)1.63 (br. s., 1H) 1.47 (t, J=7.65 Hz, 3H) 1.30-1.41 (m, 1H) 0.99-1.10(m, 1H) 0.71 (dd, J=8.28, 4.77 Hz, 1H) 0.38 (t, J=5.02 Hz, 1H)

Synthesis of Compound 64

Accordingly, Compound 64 was prepared in the same way as Compound 62starting from 6-ethyl-2-methylimidazo[2,1-b]thiazole-5-carboxylic acidCAS [1131613-58-5], and intermediate BK, yielding 0.048 g, 32%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm 7.95 (d, J=1.51 Hz, 1H) 7.10 (d, J=8.53Hz, 2H) 6.91 (d, J=8.53 Hz 2H) 5.72 (br. s., 1H) 3.45-3.58 (m, 2H) 3.34(t, J=13.05 Hz, 2H) 3.07-3.18 (m, 2H) 2.89 (q, J=7.53 Hz, 2H) 2.43 (d,J=1.51 Hz, 3H) 1.82-1.93 (m, 1H) 1.69-1.80 (m, 1H) 1.63 (br. s., 1H)1.38 (t, J=7.65 Hz, 3H) 1.30 (t, J=7.65 Hz, 1H) 0.97-1.07 (m, 1H) 0.68(dd, J=8.91, 4.39 Hz, 1H) 0.35 (t, J=4.89 Hz, 1H)

Synthesis of Compound 65

A solution of 2-ethyl-5H,6H,7,8H-imidazo[1,2-a]pyridine-3˜carboxylicacid (CAS [1529528-99-1], 0.18 g, 0.41 mmol), HATU (0.204 g, 0.54 mmol),diisopropylethylamine (0.139 g, 1.08 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was stirred for30 minutes at 25° C. Intermediate I (0.15 g, 0.41 mmol) was added to themixture and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours at 25° C. The crudeproduct was purified by high performance liquid chromatography overWaters Xbridge Prep OBD (eluent: 0.05% ammonia water/acetonitrile 25/75to 5/95). The desired fractions were collected and lyophilized to giveCompound 65 0.035 g, 29%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm 7.27-7.31 (m, 2H) 7.19 (d, J=8.03 Hz, 2H)7.06 (d, J=8.28 Hz, 2H) 6.37-6.42 (m, 2H) 5.92 (br. s., 1H) 4.58 (d,J=5.77 Hz, 2H) 4.23 (t, J=5.77 Hz, 2H) 4.01 (s, 2H) 3.79 (s, 2H) 3.47(quin, J=8.72 Hz, 1H) 2.86 (t, J=6.40 Hz, 2H) 2.71 (q, J=7.70 Hz, 2H)2.61-2.68 (m, 2H) 2.31-2.39 (m, 2H) 1.83-2.00 (m, 4H) 1.25 (t, J=7.65Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 66

A mixture of intermediate L (0.011 g, 0.049 mmol), intermediate AD (0.02g, 0.049 mmol), HATU (0.024 g, 0.063 mmol), and diisopropylethylamine(0.032 g, 0.245 mmol) in dichloromethane (1 mL) was stirred at roomtemperature for 2 hours. The mixture was concentrated under vacuum.Ethyl acetate (20 mL) was added and the mixture was washed with water(2×20 mL) and brine (20 mL). The separated organic layer was dried overmagnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under vacuum. The residuewas purified by high performance liquid chromatography over PhenomenexGemini C18 250×21.2 mm×5 μm (eluent: water (0.05% ammonia hydroxidev/v)/methanol 25/75 to 5/95). The desired fractions were collected andlyophilized to give Compound 66, 0.011 g, 37%.

Synthesis of Compound 67

A mixture of 6-ethyl-2-methylimidazo[2,1-b]thiazole-5-carboxylic acid(CAS [1131613-58-5], 0.038 g, 0.18 mmol), HATU (0.082 g, 0.22 mmol), anddiisopropylethylamine (0.056 g, 0.43 mmol) in DMF (20 mL) was stirredfor 30 minutes at 25° C. Intermediate I (0.06 g, 0.17 mmol) was added tothe mixture and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours at 25° C. Themixture was concentrated under vacuum. The crude product was purified byhigh performance liquid chromatography over Phenomenex Gemini(water(0.05% HCl)/ACN 60/40 to 30/70). The desired fractions werecollected and lyophilized to give Compound 67, 0.036 g, 33%.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) 6=7.98 (s, 1H), 7.28 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 2H),7.18 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 7.04 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.38 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H),5.96 (br. s., 1H), 4.62 (d, J=5.7 Hz, 2H), 3.99 (s, 2H), 3.77 (s, 2H),3.45 (quin, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 2.84 (q, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.67-2.59 (m, 2H),2.47-2.38 (m, 3H), 2.36-2.29 (m, 2H), 1.40-1.29 (m, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 68

Diisopropylethylamine (0.512 mL; 2.98 mmol) and HATU (0.588 g; 1.55mmol) were added successively to a solution of6-ethyl-2-methylimidazo[2,1-b]thiazole-5-carboxylic acid (CAS[1131613-58-5], 0.25 g, 1.19 mmol) in DMF (30 mL). The resulting mixturewas stirred at room temperature for 30 min, before the addition ofintermediate Q (0.432 g, 1.19 mmol) and the mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 4 h. The reaction mixture was evaporated in vacuo untildryness, diluted with EtOAc and washed with brine (twice). The organiclayer was dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to give 1.1 g asbrown oil. The crude product was purified by preparative LC (RegularSiOH 30 μm, 40 g Interchim, dry loading (Celite®), mobile phasegradient: from CH₂Cl₂/MeOH 100:0 to 95:5) to obtain 0.203 g as anoff-white foam which was triturated in Et₂O, filtered and dried underhigh vacuum to give 0.151 g of Compound 68 as an off-white solid (23%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 8.02 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.87 (d, J=1.5Hz, 1H), 7.16 (dd, J=8.6, 3.5 Hz, 4H), 6.49 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 6.42 (d,J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 4.35 (d, J=6.1 Hz, 2H), 3.94 (s, 4H) 4.00 (s, 4H), 2.84(q, J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.41 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 3H), 1.19 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H).

Synthesis of Compound 69, Compound 70 and Compound 71

Preparation of Intermediate BL

A mixture of 2-aminopyrazine (CAS [5049-61-6], 12 g, 126.18 mmol) andintermediate J (39.6 g, 189.27 mmol) in EtOH (10 mL) was stirred at 100°C. for 12 h. The solvent was removed in vacuum. The crude product waspurified by column chromatography (petroleum ether/ethylacetate=5/1˜1/1). The product fractions were collected and the solventwas evaporated to give intermediate BL, 2 g, 8%.

Preparation of Intermediate BM

To a solution of intermediate BL (5 g, 24.36 mmol) in MeOH (20 mL) wasadded platine dioxide (500 mg) under N₂, followed by addition a drop ofcon HCl. The suspension was degassed under vacuum and purged with H₂several times. The mixture was stirred under H₂ (15 psi) at 25° C. for10 hours. The suspension was filtered through a pad of Celite® and thepad was washed with methanol (50 mL). The combined filtrates wereconcentrated to dryness to give intermediate BM, 5 g, 98%.

Preparation of Intermediate BN

To a solution of intermediate BM (5 g, 23.89 mmol) in MeOH (75 mL) wasadded formaldehyde aqueous solution (9.7 g, 119.47 mmol, 37%) at 0° C.,followed by addition sodium borocyanohydride (7.5 g, 119.47 mmol) and adrop of acetic acid (0.2 mL). Then the mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for overnight. 10% NH₄Cl solution (25 mL) was addeddropwise. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate, the combinedorganic layers were washed with brine, dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered andthe solvent was evaporated under vacuum. The residue was purified bycolumn chromatography over silica gel (dichloromethane/methanol=15:1 to10:1) to give intermediate BN, 1.3 g, 24%.

Preparation of Intermediate BO

To a solution of intermediate BN (0.55 g, 2.46 mmol) in MeOH (25 mL) andwater (5 mL) was added lithium hydroxide monohydrate (0.52 g, 12.32mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 10 h. The solventwas removed in vacuum to dryness. The residue was purified by highperformance liquid chromatography (DuraShell 150×25 mm×5 μm, 25 ml/min,water (containing 0.05% HCl)/Acetonitrile from 100/0 to 70/30). Thedesired fraction was collected and evaporated to remove off acetonitrilein vacuum. The residue was lyophilized to give intermediate BO, 0.4 g,78%.

Preparation of Compound 69

A solution of intermediate BO (0.04 g, 0.19 mmol), HATU (0.095 g, 0.25mmol), diisopropylethylamine (0.064 g, 0.5 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) wasstirred for 30 minutes at 25° C. Intermediate I (0.069 g, 0.19 mmol) wasadded to the mixture and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours at 25° C.The crude product was purified by high performance liquid chromatographyover Waters Xbridge Prep OBD (eluent: 0.05% ammonia water/acetonitrilefrom 50/50 to 20/80). The desired fractions were collected andlyophilized to give Compound 69, 0.053 g, 50%

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm 7.27-7.31 (m, 2H) 7.17-7.22 (m, 2H) 7.06(d, J=8.28 Hz, 2H) 6.37-6.42 (m, 2H) 5.94 (br. s., 1H) 4.58 (d, J=5.52Hz, 2H) 4.32 (t, J=5.65 Hz, 2H) 4.01 (s, 2H) 3.79 (s, 2H) 3.65 (s, 2H)3.39-3.53 (m, 1H) 2.80 (t, J=5.65 Hz, 2H) 2.72 (q, J=7.70 Hz, 2H)2.61-2.68 (m, 2H) 2.47 (s, 3H) 2.29-2.40 (m, 2H) 1.26 (t, J=7.53 Hz, 3H)

Preparation of Compound 70

Accordingly, Compound 70 was prepared in the same way as Compound 69starting from intermediate BO and intermediate Q affording 0.06 g, 50%.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ=7.21 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 2H), 7.09 (d, J=8.3 Hz,2H), 6.45 (dd, J=8.5, 17.8 Hz, 4H), 5.85 (br. s., 1H), 4.50 (d, J=5.5Hz, 2H), 4.32 (t, J=5.4 Hz, 2H), 4.04 (s, 8H), 3.65 (s, 2H), 2.80 (t,J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 2.70 (q, J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.48 (s, 3H), 1.24 (t, J=7.5 Hz,3H).

Preparation of Compound 71

Accordingly, Compound 71 was prepared in the same way as Compound 69starting from intermediate BO and intermediate V affording 0.035 g, 38%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm 7.10-7.23 (m, 6H) 6.45 (d, J=7.94 Hz, 2H)5.83 (br. s., 1H) 4.48 (d, J=5.29 Hz, 2H) 4.32 (t, J=5.51 Hz, 2H) 4.01(s, 2H) 3.80 (s, 2H) 3.64 (s, 2H) 3.43-3.50 (m, 1H) 2.79 (t, J=5.51 Hz,2H) 2.67 (dt, J=15.33, 7.99 Hz, 4H) 2.47 (s, 3H) 2.28-2.39 (m, 2H) 1.23(t, J=7.50 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 72, Compound 73 and Compound 74

Preparation of Intermediate BP

DIAD (1.40 g, 6.92 mmol) in toluene (10 mL) was added to a solution oftert-butyl 6-hydroxy-2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane-2-carboxylate (CAS[1147557-97-8], 1.2 g, 5.63 mmol), 4-(trifluoromethyl)phenol (CAS[402-45-9], 1.10 g, 6.75 mmol), and triphenylphosphine (2.31 g, 8.80mmol) in toluene (40 mL) at 0° C. under N₂ flow. The mixture was stirredovernight at room temperature. The mixture was concentrated. The crudeproduct was purified by column chromatography over silica gel (petroleumether/ethyl acetate from 1/0 to 3/1). The desired fraction was collectedand concentrated to give intermediate BP, 2 g, 99%.

Preparation of Intermediate BQ

A mixture of intermediate BP (2 g, 5.60 mmol) in formic acid (10 mL) wasstirred for 12 hours. The mixture was concentrated to give intermediateBQ, 1.4 g, 97%.

Preparation of Intermediate BR

A solution of intermediate BQ (1.4 g, 5.44 mmol), 4-iodobenzonitrile(CAS [3058-39-7], 0.99 g, 5.44 mmol), BINAP (0.203 g, 0.33 mmol),Pd₂(dba)₃ (0.1 g, 0.11 mmol), sodium tert-butoxide (1.57 g, 16.33 mmol)and triethylamine (0.38 mL) in toluene (50 mL) was stirred overnight at110° C. under N₂ flow. The mixture was concentrated. The residue wasdissolved in CH₂Cl₂ (100 mL) and water (100 mL). The organic layer waswashed with brine (100 mL), dried over MgSO₄ and filtered. The filtratewas concentrated. The crude product was purified by columnchromatography over silica gel (ethyl acetate/petroleum ether from 0 to1/5). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated to giveintermediate BR, 1.8 g, 92%.

Preparation of Intermediate BS

A mixture of intermediate BR (0.2 g, 0.56 mmol) in ammonia 7N inmethanol (20 mL) was hydrogenated with Raney Nickel (20 mg) as catalystat 25° C. (15 Psi) for 16 hours. After uptake of H₂, the catalyst wasfiltered off and the filtrate was concentrated to give intermediate BS,0.2 g, 99%.

Preparation of Compound 73

A solution of intermediate L (0.112 g, 0.25 mmol), HATU (0.122 g, 0.32mmol), diisopropylethylamine (0.083 g, 0.65 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) wasstirred for 30 minutes at 25° C. Intermediate BS (0.09 g, 0.25 mmol) wasadded to the mixture and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours at 25° C.The mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The crude product waspurified by high performance liquid chromatography over PhenomenexGemini (eluent: 0.05% ammonia water/acetonitrile 35/65 to 5/95). Thedesired fractions were collected and lyophilized to give Compound 73,0.016 g, 11%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm 9.83 (d, J=2.65 Hz, 1H) 8.47-8.60 (m, 1H)7.53 (d, J=8.38 Hz, 2H) 7.22 (d, J=7.94 Hz, 2H) 6.86 (d, J=8.38 Hz, 2H)6.45 (d, J=8.38 Hz, 2H) 6.05 (br. s., 1H) 4.63-4.71 (m, 1H) 4.58 (d,J=5.29 Hz, 2H) 3.95 (s, 2H) 3.90 (s, 2H) 2.98 (q, J=7.50 Hz, 2H)2.76-2.84 (m, 2H) 2.39-2.47 (m, 2H) 1.42 (t, J=7.50 Hz, 3H)

Preparation of Compound 72

Accordingly, Compound 72 was prepared in the same way as Compound 73starting from 6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[3,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acidCAS [1216142-18-5] and intermediate BS affording 0.035 g, 28%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm 9.52 (s, 1H) 7.53 (d, J=8.38 Hz, 3H) 7.29(dd, J=9.48, 1.98 Hz, 1H) 7.23 (d, J=8.38 Hz, 2H) 6.86 (d, J=8.82 Hz,2H) 6.46 (d, J=8.38 Hz, 2H) 5.99 (br. s., 1H) 4.64-4.70 (m, 1H) 4.58 (d,J=5.29 Hz, 2H) 3.95 (s, 2H) 3.90 (s, 2H) 2.94 (q, J=7.50 Hz, 2H) 2.80(ddd, J=10.47, 6.95, 2.87 Hz, 2H) 2.43 (ddd, J=10.25, 6.73, 3.31 Hz, 2H)1.38 (t, J=7.50 Hz, 3H)

Preparation of Compound 74

Accordingly, Compound 74 was prepared in the same way as Compound 73starting from intermediate BO and intermediate BS affording 0.064 g,70%.

Synthesis of Compound 75

Preparation of Intermediate BT

In a Shlenck reactor, a solution of 6-Boc-2,6-diazaspiro[3.4]octane (CAS[885270-86-0], 0.5 g, 2.36 mmol), 1-Bromo-4-(trifluoromethoxy)benzene(CAS [407-14-7], 525 μL, 3.53 mmol) and sodium terbutoxide (0.453 g,4.71 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (25 mL) was purged with N₂. Then Palladium(II) acetate (52.9 mg, 0.236 mmol) and Xantphos (0.136 g, 0.236 mmol)were added, the mixture was purged again with N₂ and stirred at 100° C.for 2 h. The mixture was combined filtered on a pad of Celite®. The cakewas washed with EtOAc and the filtrate was evaporated in vacuo to give1.2 g as a brown solid. The residue was purified by preparative LC(irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 50 g, Merck, dry loading (Celite®), mobilephase gradient: from Heptane/EtOAc from 95/5 to 60/40) to give 0.756 gof intermediate BT as off-white solid (80%).

Preparation of Intermediate BU

To a solution of intermediate BT (0.706 g, 1.90 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (20 mL)was added trifluoroacetic acid (7.25 mL, 94.7 mmol) (reaction mixtureturn brown) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20 min.The mixture was poured into a sat. solution of NaHCO₃. The layers wereseparated and the aqueous layer was extracted with CH₂Cl₂. The combinedorganic layers were dried over MgSO₄, filtered off and evaporated invacuo to give brown oil which was triturated in Et₂O and filtered off togive 0.519 g of intermediate BU as a off-white powder (98%).

Preparation of Intermediate BV

In a sealed tube, a solution of intermediate BU (0.5 g, 1.84 mmol),4-Bromobenzonitrile (CAS [623-00-7], 0.5 g, 2.76 mmol) and sodiumterbutoxide (0.53 g, 5.51 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (20 mL) was purged withN₂. Then Palladium (II) acetate (0.041 g, 0.184 mmol) and Xantphos(0.106 g, 0.184 mmol) were added, the mixture was purged again with N₂and stirred at 100° C. for 3 h. The mixture was cooled down to roomtemperature, filtered on a pad of Celite® and the cake was washed withEtOAc. The filtrate was evaporated in vacuo to give a brown oil. Theresidue was purified by preparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 40 g,Grace, dry loading (Celite®), mobile phase gradient: from Heptane/EtOAcfrom 95/5 to 50/50) to give 0.429 g of a yellow oil (which crystalizedon standing). The oil was purified by Reverse phase (Stationary phase:YMC-actus Triart-C18 10 μm 30×150 mm, Mobile phase: Gradient from (aq.NH₄HCO₃ 0.2%)/CAN from 50/50 to 0/100) to give 0.328 g of intermediateBV as a yellow solid (48%).

Preparation of Intermediate BW

In an autoclave, to a solution of intermediate BV (0.28 g, 0.75 mmol) inAmmonia 7M in methanol (7.8 mL) was added Raney Nickel and the mixturewas hydrogenated at room temperature under 2 bar for 1 h. The mixturewas filtered on a pad of Celite® and the cake was washed with MeOH. Thefiltrate was evaporated in vacuo to give a black solid which wassolubilized in EtOAc, filtered off and the filtrate was evaporated toprovide 0.244 g of intermediate BW as a white solid (86%).

Preparation of Compound 75

A solution of 6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[3,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid(CAS [1216142-18-5], 0.155 g, 0.647 mmol), intermediate BW (0.244 g,0.647 mmol), HATU (0.271 g, 0.712 mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (0.286mL, 1.68 mmol) in DMF (6.5 mL) was stirred at room temperatureovernight. The mixture was heated at 50° C. for 2 h. The mixture wascooled down to room temperature and evaporated in vacuo to give 980 mgof black oil. The residue was purified by preparative LC (irregularSiOH, 15-40 μm, 50 g, Merck, dry loading (Celite®), mobile phasegradient: from Heptane/EtOAc from 95/5 to 50/50) to give 0.254 g ofresidue as a yellow solid.

The residue was purified by reverse phase (spherical C18, 25 μm, 40 gYMC-ODS-25, dry loading (Celite®), mobile phase gradient (aq. NH₄HCO₃0.2%)/MeCN from 30/70 to 0/100) to give a white solid which wastriturated in pentane, filtered off and evaporated under vacuum (50° C.,16 h) affording 0.156 g of compound 75 as a white solid (41%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 9.06 (s, 1H), 8.35 (br t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H),7.65 (d, J=9.6 Hz, 1H), 7.44 (dd, J=9.6, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.20 (br d, J=8.1Hz, 2H), 7.16 (br d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.53 (br d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.49 (brd, J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 4.40 (d, J=6.1 Hz, 2H), 3.82 (s, 4H), 3.46 (s, 2H),3.25-3.29 (m, 2H), 2.96 (q, J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.23 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 2H), 1.25(t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 76

Preparation of Intermediate BX

Accordingly, intermediate BX was prepared in the same way asintermediate BT starting from 6-Boc-2,6-diazaspiro[3.4]octane CAS[885270-86-0] and 4-bromobenzonitrile CAS [623-00-7] affording 0.673 g,84%.

Preparation of Intermediate BY

Accordingly, intermediate BY was prepared in the same way asintermediate BU starting from intermediate BX affording 0.312 g, 80%.

Preparation of Intermediate BZ

Accordingly, intermediate BZ was prepared in the same way asintermediate BV starting from intermediate BY and1-bromo-4-(trifluoromethoxy)benzene CAS [407-14-7] affording 0.369 g,73%.

Preparation of Intermediate CA

Accordingly, intermediate CA was prepared in the same way asintermediate BW starting from intermediate BZ affording 0.2 g, 56%.

Preparation of Compound 76

Accordingly, Compound 76 was prepared in the same way as Compound 75starting from 6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[3,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acidCAS [1216142-18-5] and intermediate CA affording 0.078 g, 30%.

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 9.07 (s, 1H), 8.41 (t, J=6.2 Hz, 1H),7.67 (d, J=9.5 Hz, 1H), 7.46 (dd, J=9.6, 1.7 Hz, 1H), 7.21 (m, J=8.2 Hz,2H), 7.15 (br d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.57 (d, J=9.1 Hz, 2H), 6.46 (m, J=8.2Hz, 2H), 4.42 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 3.79 (s, 4H), 3.47 (s, 2H), 3.30-3.33(m, 2H), 2.97 (q, J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.24 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 1.26 (t, J=7.4Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 77

A solution of intermediate AF (0.1 g, 0.574 mmol), intermediate M (0.28g, 0.631 mmol), X-phos (0.033 g, 0.069 mmol), Pd(dba)₂ (0.02 g, 0.034mmol) and sodium tert-butoxide (0.221 g, 2.30 mmol) in dioxane (4 mL)was irradiated under microwave at 100° C. for 1 hour under N₂. Themixture was concentrated. The crude product was purified by highperformance liquid chromatography over Gemini (eluent: NH₃water/acetonitrile 45/55 to 45/55). The desired fractions were collectedand concentrated to give Compound 77, 0.0076 g, 3%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 9.53 (d, J=1.25 Hz, 1H) 8.47 (s,2H) 7.50-7.56 (m, 2H) 7.30 (d, J=2.01 Hz, 1H) 7.28 (d, J=2.01 Hz, 1H)7.25 (s, 1H) 7.23 (s, 1H) 6.47 (d, J=8.53 Hz, 2H) 5.99 (s, 1H) 4.59 (d,J=5.27 Hz, 2H) 4.04 (s, 2H) 3.83 (s, 2H) 3.50 (t, J=8.78 Hz, 1H) 2.95(q, J=7.53 Hz, 2H) 2.63-2.75 (m, 2H) 2.30-2.44 (m, 2H) 1.39 (t, J=7.65Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 78

Preparation of Intermediate CB

A solution of 2-fluoro-6-azaspiro[3.3]heptane (CAS [1354953-09-5], 0.8g, 6.95 mmol), 4-bromobenzonitrile (CAS [623-00-7], 1.265 g, 6.95 mmol),BINAP (0.26 g, 0.42 mmol), Pd₂(dba)₃ (0.127 g, 0.14 mmol), sodiumtert-butoxide (2 g, 20.84 mmol) and triethylamine (0.48 mL) in toluene(50 mL) was stirred overnight at 110° C. under N₂ flow. The mixture wasconcentrated. The residue was dissolved in CH₂C₂ (300 mL) and water (150mL). The organic layer was washed with brine (150 mL), dried overmagnesium sulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated. The crudeproduct was purified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent:ethyl acetate/petroleum ether from 0 to 1/5). The desired fractions werecollected and concentrated to give intermediate CB, 1 g, 66%.

Preparation of Intermediate CC

A mixture of intermediate CB (0.45 g, 2.08 mmol) in ammonia 7M in MeOH(20 mL) was hydrogenated with Raney Nickel (40 mg) as catalyst at 25° C.(H₂, 15 Psi) for 16 hours. After uptake of H₂, the catalyst was filteredoff and the filtrate was concentrated to give intermediate CC, 0.45 g,98%.

Preparation of Compound 78

A solution of intermediate BO) (0.048 g, 0.23 mmol), HATU (0.112 g, 0.3mmol), diisopropylethylamine (0.076 g, 059 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) wasstirred for 30 minutes at 25° C. Intermediate CC (0.05 g, 0.23 mmol) wasadded to the mixture and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours at 25° C.The crude product was purified by high performance liquid chromatographyover Phenomenex Gemini (eluent: 0.05% ammonia water/methanol 30/70 to0/100). The desired fractions were collected and lyophilized to giveCompound 78, 0.0134 g, 14%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 7.18 (d, J=8.53 Hz, 2H) 6.38-6.45(m, 2H) 5.83 (br. s., 1H) 4.86-5.09 (m, 1H) 4.48 (d, J=5.52 Hz, 2H) 4.31(t, J=5.65 Hz, 2H) 3.88 (s, 2H) 3.84 (s, 2H) 3.64 (s, 2H) 2.79 (t,J=5.52 Hz, 2H) 2.67-2.71 (m, 2H) 2.60-2.67 (m, 2H) 2.38-2.50 (m, 5H)1.22 (t, J=7.53 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 79

Preparation of Intermediate CD

A mixture of 5-chloro-3-iodopyridin-2-amine (CAS [211308-81-5], 4 g,15.72 mmol), 2,4-Hexadione (CAS [3002-24-2], 4.50 g, 34.58 mmol), cesiumcarbonate (5.12 g, 15.71 mmol), BINOL (900.20 mg, 3.14 mmol) and copperiodide (299.39 mg, 1.57 mmol) in DMSO (50 mL) was stirred for 15 hoursunder N₂ flow. Brine and ethyl acetate were added to the mixture. Theorganic layer was separated, washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄ andfiltered. The filtrate was concentrated. The crude product was purifiedby column chromatography over silica gel (eluent: ethyl acetate/hexanefrom 0 to 1/1). The desired fractions were collected and concentrated togive intermediate CD, 2.5 g, 67%

Preparation of Intermediate CE

Sodium hydride (0.354 g, 8.85 mmol) was added to a solution ofintermediate CD (2.2 g, 7.38 mmol) in THE (40 mL) at 0° C. After stirredfor 30 minutes, methyl iodide (1.26 g, 8.85 mmol) was added. The mixturewas warmed up to 25° C. and stirred for 3 hours. The mixture was pouredinto ice water. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (50 mL×2).The organic layers were combined, washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated. The crude product waspurified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent: ethylacetate/petroleum ether from 0 to 1/3). The filtrate was concentrated togive intermediate CE, 1.6 g, 86%.

Preparation of Intermediate CF

A mixture of intermediate CE (1.6 g, 6.33 mmol) in sodium hydroxideaqueous (5 g, 62.51 mmol, 50% in H₂O) solution was stirred overnight at80° C. Thin layer chromatography (eluent: ethyl acetate/petroleumether=1/3) showed starting material was consumed. The mixture wasconcentrated. The mixture was extracted with methyl tert-butyl ether (25mL×2). The water layers were extracted with solution (ethylacetate/petroleum ether=1/3) (2×50 mL). The water layers were adjustedwith 1 N HCl until pH was 4. The residue was filtered and concentratedto give intermediate CF, 1.3 g, 86%.

Preparation of Compound 79

A solution of intermediate CF (0.06 g, 0.25 mmol), HATU (0.123 g, 0.33mmol), diisopropylethylamine (0.08 g, 0.62 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) wasstirred for 30 minutes at 25° C. Intermediate Q (0.1 g, 0.28 mmol) wasadded to the mixture and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours at 25° C.The mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The crude product waspurified by high performance liquid chromatography over Gemini (eluent:0.05% ammonia/methanol 40/60 to 10/90). The desired fractions werecollected and concentrated to give Compound 79, 0.052 g, 36%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 8.22 (d, J=1.76 Hz, 1H) 7.91 (d,J=1.76 Hz, 1H) 7.28 (s, 2H) 7.08 (d, J=8.82 Hz, 2H) 6.49 (d, J=8.38 Hz,2H) 6.42 (d, J=8.82 Hz, 2H) 5.89 (br. s., 1H) 4.59 (d, J=5.29 Hz, 2H)4.04 (d, J=2.21 Hz, 7H) 3.83 (s, 3H) 3.21 (q, J=7.50 Hz, 2H) 1.33 (t,J=7.72 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 80

A solution of 5-chloro-2-ethyl-1-methylindole-3-carboxylic acid (CAS[1784796-04-8], 0.131 g, 0.55 mmol), HATU (0.272 g, 0.72 mmol),diisopropylethylamine (0.185 g, 1.43 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) was stirredfor 30 minutes at 25° C. Intermediate Q (0.1 g, 0.28 mmol) was added tothe mixture and the mixture was stirred for 2 hours at 25° C. Themixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified by highperformance liquid chromatography over Waters Xbridge Prep OBD C18150×30×5μ (eluent: NH₃ water/acetonitrile from 70/65 to 40/95). Thedesired fractions were collected and lyophilized to give Compound 80,0.0423 g, 13%.

1H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 7.62 (d, J=1.76 Hz, 1H) 7.28 (d,J=8.53 Hz, 2H) 7.22-7.25 (m, 1H) 7.14-7.19 (m, 1H) 7.08 (d, J=8.78 Hz,2H) 6.49 (d, J=8.53 Hz, 2H) 6.42 (d, J=9.03 Hz, 2H) 6.01 (br. s., 1H)4.61 (d, J=5.52 Hz, 2H) 4.04 (s, 8H) 3.72 (s, 3H) 3.19 (q, J=7.19 Hz,2H) 1.30 (t, J=7.53 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 81

A solution of intermediate M (0.1 g, 0.23 mmol),2-fluoro-7-aza-spiro[3.5]nonane (CAS [1263178-15-9], 0.049 g, 0.23mmol), X-phos (0.0105 g, 0.022 mmol), Pd(dba)₂ (0.0065 g, 0.011 mmol)and sodium tert-butoxide (0.055 g, 0.57 mmol) in dioxane (3 mL) wasirradiated under microwave at 100° C. for 1 hour under N₂. The mixturewas concentrated. The crude product was purified by high performanceliquid chromatography over Gemini (C18 150×25 mm×10μ, 25 mL/min, eluent:NH₃ water/acetonitrile 45/55 to 45/55). The desired fractions werecollected and concentrated to give Compound 81, 0.0073 g, 7%.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 9.53 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.54 (d, J=9.5 Hz,1H), 7.33-7.26 (m, 3H), 6.95 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.02 (br. s., 1H), 5.86(tdd, J=7.4, 10.0, 17.1 Hz, 1H), 5.20-5.08 (m, 2H), 4.61 (d, J=5.5 Hz,2H), 3.50 (d, J=12.3 Hz, 2H), 3.10 (dt, J=2.4, 12.2 Hz, 2H), 2.96 (q,J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.47-2.34 (m, 2H), 1.99-1.63 (m, 4H), 1.39 (t, J=7.5 Hz,3H)

Synthesis of Compound 82

Preparation of Intermediate CG

A solution of 2-aminopyridine (CAS [504-29-0], 4.0 g; 42.5 mmol) in THE(220 mL) was cooled to 5° C., before the addition of ethylpropionylacetate (CAS [4949-44-4], 6.1 mL; 42.5 mmol), IodobenzeneDiacetate (CAS [3240-34-4], 13.7 g; 42.5 mmol) and BF₃·OEt₂ (556 μL;2.13 mmol). The resulting mixture was allowed to warm to rt, thenstirred at rt overnight. The mixture was poured into saturated aqueousNaHCO₃ and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were washedwith brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated to give 18.8 gas an orange solid. The crude was taken-up in Et₂O, leading toprecipitation. The precipitate was filtered to give 3.8 g of crude as anoff-white solid (41%). The filtrate was purified by preparative LC(Regular silica 30 μm, 25 g, liquid loading (CH₂Cl₂), mobile phasegradient: from Heptane/EtOAc 100/0 to 50/50) to obtain 1.7 g ofintermediate 30 as an off-white solid which was taken-up in Et₂O, thesolid was filtered and dried under high vacuum to give 1.2 g ofintermediate CG as a white solid (13%).

Preparation of Intermediate CH

A solution of intermediate CG (1.2 g; 5.50 mmol) in MeOH (27 mL) wasdegassed by N₂ bubbling for 10 min before the addition of Platinum Oxide(125 mg; 0.55 mmol) and HCl (125 μL; 1.50 mmol). The resulting mixturewas hydrogenated at rt under 1 bar overnight. EtOAc was added and themixture was filtered through a pad of Celite®, the filtrate wasconcentrated until dryness to give 1.4 g of intermediate CH ascolourless oil (quant).

Preparation of Intermediate CI

Lithium hydroxide monohydrate (170 mg; 4.05 mmol) was added to asolution of intermediate CH (300 mg; 1.35 mmol) in MeOH (3 mL) and H₂O(158 μL). The resulting mixture was stirred at 50° C. for 48 h. Thesolvent was evaporated in vacuo until dryness to give an off-white gumwhich was azeotroped with toluene (twice), then dried under high vacuumto give 0.353 g of intermediate CI as an off-white solid (used as suchin the next step).

Preparation of Compound 82

Diisopropylethylamine (0.232 mL; 1.35 mmol) and HATU (0.267 g; 0.70mmol) were added successively to a solution of intermediate CI (0.108 g;0.54 mmol) in DMF (10 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 30 min, before the addition of intermediate V (0.196 g;0.54 mmol) in DMF (7 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperaturefor 4 h. The reaction mixture was evaporated in vacuo until dryness,then diluted with EtOAc and washed with brine (twice). The organic layerwas dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness to give 585 mgas a brown oil which was purified by preparative LC (Regular silica 30μm, 12 g, dry loading (Celite®), mobile phase gradientHeptane/EtOAc/MeOH from 90/8/2 to 50/40/10) to obtain 0.131 g as anoff-white solid. The solid was triturated in Et₂O, filtered and driedunder high vacuum to give 97 mg of Compound 82 as a white solid (33%over 2 steps).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 8.08 (t, J=6.1 Hz, 1H) 7.35 (d, J=8.6Hz, 2H) 7.29 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 2H) 7.11 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H) 6.39 (d, J=8.1 Hz,2H) 4.28 (d, J=6.1 Hz, 2H) 3.96 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 2H) 3.91 (s, 2H) 3.70 (s,2H) 3.47 (quint, J=8.8 Hz, 1H) 2.66-2.72 (m, 2H) 2.52-2.62 (m, 4H)2.26-2.34 (m, 2H) 1.74-1.87 (m, 4H) 1.08 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 83

Diisopropylethylamine (0.31 mL, 1.78 mmol) and HATU (0.353 g, 0.927mmol) were successively added to a solution of6-Ethyl-2-methylimidazo[2,1-b]thiazole-5-carboxylic acid (CAS[1131613-58-5], 0.15 g, 0.713 mmol) in DMF (20 mL). The resultingmixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min, before the additionof intermediate V (259 mg, 0.713 mmol) and the mixture was stirred atroom temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAcand washed with an aq. sat. NaHCO₃ solution (twice) and brine (twice).The combined organic phases were dried over MgSO₄, filtered andevaporated to dryness. The crude was purified by preparative LC(Irregular silica 15-40 μm, 12 g, dry loading (silica), mobile phasegradient: from Heptane/EtOAc 90/10 to 50/50) and the obtained solid wastriturated in pentane, filtered and dried under vacuo at 45° C. toobtain 0.167 g of Compound 83 as white solid (42%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 8.01 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H) 7.87 (s, 1H) 7.36(d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H) 7.28 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H) 7.15 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 2H) 6.40 (d,J=8.6 Hz, 2H) 4.35 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H) 3.91 (s, 2H) 3.70 (s, 2H) 3.47 (brt, J=8.6 Hz, 1H) 2.84 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H) 2.55-2.62 (m, 2H) 2.41 (s, 3H)2.25-2.35 (m, 2H) 1.19 (t, J=7.58 Hz, 3H).

Synthesis of Compound 84 and Compound 85

Preparation of Intermediate CJ

A suspension of 6-methoxy-2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane hydrochloride (CAS[1638761-19-9], 0.47 g, 2.36 mmol), 4-Fluorobenzonitrile (CAS[1194-02-1], 0.576 g, 4.71 mmol) and potassium carbonate (0.976 g, 7.07mmol) in DMSO (11 mL) was heated at 120° C. using a single modemicrowave (Biotage Initiator60) with a power output ranging from 0 to400 W for 30 min [fixed hold time]. The reaction mixture was evaporatedin a Genevac apparatus and purified by preparative LC (irregular silica,15-40 μm, 50 g, dry loading (Celite®), mobile phase gradientHeptane/EtOAc from 95/5 to 70/30) to give 0.361 g of intermediate CJ asa white solid (67%).

Preparation of Intermediate CK

In an autoclave, Raney Nickel (0.8 g, 13.6 mmol) was added to a solutionof intermediate CJ (0.713 g, 3.12 mmol) in ammonia 7N in MeOH (15 mL)and the mixture was stirred at room temperature under 3 bar of H₂overnight. The mixture was filtered over Celite® and evaporated in vacuoto give 0.717 g of intermediate CK as a blue oil (99%).

Preparation of Compound 84

Diisopropylethylamine (0.461 mL, 2.71 mmol) and HATU (436 mg, 1.15 mmol)were added successively to a solution of6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[32a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid (CAS[1216142-18-5], 0.25 g, 1.04 mmol) in DMF (10 mL). The resulting mixturewas stirred at room temperature for 30 min., then a solution ofintermediate CK (0.242 g, 1.04 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was added and themixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. The reaction mixturewas evaporated in vacuo until dryness. The crude product was purified bypreparative LC (irregular silica, 15-40 μm, 120 g, dry loading (silica),mobile phase gradient: from DCM 100%, MeOH 0% to DCM 90%, MeOH 10% in 20CV) to give 0.5 g of an orange solid, which was successively trituratedin Et₂O, Et₂O/EtOH (9:1), iPr₂O and EtOH to give 0.317 g of Compound 84as a slightly orange solid (69%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 9.05 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 8.37 (t, J=5.8Hz, 1H), 7.65 (d, J=9.6 Hz, 1H), 7.44 (dd, J=9.6, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.17 (d,J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.37 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 4.39 (d, J=6.1 Hz, 2H), 3.75 (s,2H), 3.81-3.74 (m, 1H), 3.70 (s, 2H), 3.11 (s, 3H), 2.95 (q, J=7.4 Hz,2H), 2.47-2.41 (m, 2H), 2.02 (ddd, J=10.0, 7.0, 2.8 Hz, 2H), 1.27-1.21(m, 3H)

Preparation of Compound 85

A solution of Compound 84 (0.08 g; 114 mmol) in MeOH (3.5 mL) wasdegassed by N₂ bubbling for 5 min before the addition of Pd/C (0.0032 g;3.01 μmol). The resulting mixture was hydrogenated at room temperatureunder 3 bar overnight. The mixture was filtered through a pad ofCelite®, and the filtrate was evaporated under vacuum to dryness.

The crude was purified by preparative LC (Regular silica 15-40 μm, 12 g,dry loading (Celite®), mobile phase gradient: from CH₂Cl₂/MeOH 100/0 to95/5) to obtain 0.057 g of a solid which was triturated in heptane,filtered and dried under high vacuum at 50° C. during 72 h to give 0.043g of Compound 85 as white solid (58%).

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 8.19 (br s, 1H) 7.10 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 2H)6.36 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 2H) 4.28 (d, J=5.9 Hz, 2H) 3.98 (br t, J=5.5 Hz, 2H)3.73-3.79 (m, 3H) 3.70 (s, 2H) 3.12 (s, 3H) 2.72 (br t, J=5.9 Hz, 2H)2.58-2.65 (m, 2H) 2.41-2.48 (m, 2H) 2.03 (m, 2H) 1.85 (br d, J=4.7 Hz,2H) 1.79 (br d, J=5.4 Hz, 2H) 1.09 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H).

Synthesis of Compound 86

Diisopropylethylamine (0.293 mL, 1.73 mmol) and HATU (0.402 g, 1.06mmol) were added successively to a solution of intermediate L (0.2 g,0.704 mmol) in DMF (5 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 30 min., then a solution of intermediate CK (0.135 g,0.581 mmol) in DMF (2.3 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred atroom temperature for 1 h. The reaction mixture was evaporated in vacuountil dryness to give 0.96 g as brown oil. The crude product waspurified by preparative LC (Irregular silica 15-40 μm, 40 g, dry loading(Celite®), mobile phase gradient: from DCM 99.5%, MeOH/aq·NH₃ (95:5)0.5% to DCM 94%, MeOH/aq·NH₃ (95:5) 6%) to obtain 0.516 g as an orangegum. The product was purified by Reverse phase (spherical C18 silica, 25μm, 120 g YMC-ODS-25, dry loading (Celite®), mobile phase gradient: from60% aq. (NH₄HCO₃ 0.2%), 40% MeCN to 20% aq. (NH₄HCO₃ 0.2%), 80% MeCN) togive 0.164 g of a pale yellow solid which was triturated in Et₂O,filtered and dried under high vacuum to afford 0.085 g of Compound 86 asa white solid (27%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 9.38 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.67 (d, J=2.5Hz, 1H), 8.47 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.18 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.37 (d, J=8.1Hz, 2H), 4.40 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 3.79-3.69 (m, 5H), 3.11 (s, 3H), 2.99(q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.46-2.39 (m, 2H), 2.06-1.97 (m, 2H), 1.26 (t, J=7.6Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 87

Preparation of Intermediate CL

In a flame-dried round-bottom flask under N₂, a solution of iPrMgCl·LiCl1.3 M (7.14 mL, 9.28 mmol) was added to a solution of4-Bromo-2-fluoroanisole (CAS [2357-52-0], 1.90 g, 9.28 mmol) inanhydrous THF (30 mL) at room temperature. The solution was stirred atroom temperature for 5 h under a stream of N₂, then added dropwise (ca.15 min.) to a solution of intermediate R (1.00 g, 3.09 mmol),N1,N1,N2,N2-tetramethylcyclohexane-1, 2-diamine (CAS [38383-49-2], 0.063g, 0.37 mmol) and Cobalt II chloride (0.04 g, 0.31 mmol) in anhydrousTHF (30 mL) under N₂, at 0° C. The resulting mixture was stirred at roomtemperature over week-end, hydrolyzed with aq. NH₄Cl 10% (40 mL) andextracted with ethyl acetate (2×40 mL). The combined organic phases weredried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The crude productwas purified by preparative LC (irregular silica, 15-40 μm, 220 g, dryloading (silica), mobile phase gradient: from Heptane/EtOAc from 90/10to 60/40) to give 0.619 g of intermediate CL as white solid (62%).

Preparation of Intermediate CM

Trimethylsilyl chloride (1.21 mL, 9.60 mmol) was added dropwise to asolution of intermediate CL (0.615 g, 1.91 mmol) in anhydrous methanol(20 mL) under N₂. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperatureovernight and then evaporated to dryness to give 0.447 g of intermediateCM as a white solid (91%).

Preparation of Intermediate CN

A mixture of intermediate CM (0.425 g, 1.65 mmol), 4-Fluorobenzonitrile(CAS [1194-02-1], 0.3 g, 2.47 mmol) and potassium carbonate (0.912 g,6.60 mmol) in anhydrous DMSO (10 mL) was heated at 120° C. using asingle mode microwave (Biotage Initiator60) with a power output rangingfrom 0 to 400 W for 1 h [fixed hold time]. The reaction mixture wasquenched with water (40 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (2×50 mL).The combined organic phases were washed with water (2×50 mL) and brine(2×50 mL), dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. Thecrude product was purified by preparative LC (irregular silica, 15-40μm, 120 g, dry loading (silica), mobile phase gradient: fromHeptane/EtOAc from 90/10 to 40/60) to give 0.349 g of intermediate CN asa white solid (65%).

Preparation of Intermediate CO

In an autoclave, a mixture of intermediate CN (0.34 g, 1.06 mmol), andRaney Nickel (0.269 g, 4.58 mmol) in ammonia 7N in MeOH (11 mL) wasstirred at room temperature under 3 bar of H₂ overnight. The reactionmixture was then filtered through a pad of Celite® and evaporated todryness to give 0.3 g of intermediate CO as off-white solid (87%).

Preparation of Compound 87

Diisopropylethylamine (0.19 mL, 1.09 mmol) and HATU (0.175 g, 0.46 mmol)were added successively to a solution of6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[3,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid (CAS[1216142-18-5], 0.1 g, 0.42 mmol) in DMF (7 mL). The resulting mixturewas stirred at room temperature for 1 h, then intermediate CO (0.15 g,0.46 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for2 h. The reaction mixture was evaporated in vacuo until dryness. Thecrude product was purified by preparative LC (irregular silica, 15-40μm, 40 g, liquid loading, mobile phase gradient DCM/MeOH from 100/0 to95/5) to give a yellow solid. That solid was triturated in Et₂O to give0.132 g of a yellow solid which was dissolved in EtOH and evaporated todryness to give 0.123 g of Compound 87 as a slightly yellow solid (55%).

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 9.05 (s, 1H), 8.39 (br t, J=5.7 Hz, 1H),7.66 (d, J=9.5 Hz, 1H), 7.45 (br d, J=9.5 Hz, 1H), 7.19 (d, J=8.2 Hz,2H), 7.13-7.04 (m, 2H), 6.99 (br d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.41 (d, J=8.2 Hz,2H), 4.40 (br d, J=5.7 Hz, 2H), 3.90 (s, 2H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 3.70 (s,2H), 3.40-3.33 (m, 1H), 2.96 (q, J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.28-2.23 (m, 2H), 1.25(t, J=7.4 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 88

Diisopropylethylamine (0.171 mL, 1.01 mmol) and HATU (0.162 g, 0.43mmol) were added successively to a solution of intermediate L (0.11 g,0.39 mmol) in DMF (4 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 45 min., then a solution of intermediate 38 (0.139 g,0.43 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 1 h. The reaction mixture was evaporated in vacuo untildryness. The crude product was purified by preparative LC (irregularsilica, 15-40 μm, 40 g, Grace, liquid loading, mobile phase gradientDCM/MeOH from 100/0 to 90/10) to give a brownish solid which wastriturated in Et₂O and dried under high vacuum at 50° C. overnight togive 0.098 g of a yellowish solid. This solid was dissolved in ethanoland evaporated to dryness to give a yellowish solid which was trituratedin iPr₂O to give 0.091 g of Compound 88 as a white solid (44%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 9.39 (s, 1H), 8.67 (s, 1H), 8.47 (br s,1H), 7.19 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 2H), 7.13-7.03 (m, 2H), 7.02-6.96 (m, 1H), 6.40(d, J=8.1 Hz, 2H), 4.41 (br d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 3.90 (s, 2H), 3.80 (s,3H), 3.69 (s, 2H), 3.41-3.33 (m, 1H), 3.00 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.27-2.21(m, 2H), 1.26 (br t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 89

Preparation of Intermediate CP

A solution of Pyridine-4-boronic acid (CAS [1692-15-5], 0.571 g, 4.64mmol), Potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (1.14 g, 6.19 mmol), Nickel IIiodide (0.097 g, 0.31 mmol) and trans-2-Aminocyclohexanol hydrochloride(CAS [5456-63-3], 0.036 g, 0.31 mmol) in iPrOH (20 mL) was stirred underN₂ for 5 min. at room temperature. Then, intermediate R (1.00 g, 3.09mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was heated at 90° C. for 20 h.The reaction mixture was hydrolyzed with water (50 mL) and extractedwith ethyl acetate (2×50 mL). The organic phases were combined andwashed with brine (50 mL), dried over MgSO₄ and evaporated to dryness.The crude product was purified by preparative LC (irregular silica,15-40 μm, 120 g, liquid loading, mobile phase gradient DCM/MeOH from95/5 to 90/10) to give 0.251 g of intermediate 39 as a white solid(30%).

Preparation of Intermediate CQ

Trimethylsilyl chloride (0.52 mL, 4.15 mmol) was added dropwise to asolution of intermediate CP (0.227 g, 0.83 mmol) in anhydrous methanol(10 mL) under N₂. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperatureovernight and then evaporated to dryness to give 0.194 g of intermediateCQ as a white solid (quant.), used as such in the next step.

Preparation of Intermediate CR

A mixture of intermediate CQ (0.179 g), 4-Fluorobenzonitrile (CAS[1194-02-1], 0.206 g, 1.70 mmol) and potassium carbonate (0.587 g, 4.25mmol) in anhydrous DMSO (5.5 mL) was heated at 120° C. using a singlemode microwave (Biotage Initiator60) with a power output ranging from 0to 400 W for 1 h [fixed hold time]. The reaction mixture was quenchedwith water and extracted with ethyl acetate (twice). The combinedorganic phases were washed with water (twice) and brine (twice), driedover MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The crude product waspurified by preparative LC (irregular silica, 15-40 μm, 40 g, liquidloading, mobile phase gradient DCM/MeOH from 100/0 to 95/5) to give0.095 g of intermediate CR as a white solid (41%).

Preparation of Intermediate CS

A mixture of intermediate CR (0.095 g, 0.35 mmol), and Raney Nickel0.088 g, 1.5 mmol) in ammonia 7N in MeOH (4 mL) was stirred at roomtemperature under 3 bar of H₂ overnight. The reaction mixture was thenfiltered through a pad of Celite® and evaporated until dryness to give0.078 g of intermediate CS as a white solid (81%).

Preparation of Compound 89

Diisopropylethylamine (0.118 mL, 0.69 mmol) and HATU (0.112 g, 0.29mmol) were added successively to a solution of-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[3,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid (CAS[1216142-18-5], 0.064 g, 0.27 mmol) in DMF (3 mL). The resulting mixturewas stirred at room temperature for 45 min., then a solution ofintermediate CS (0.078 g, 0.28 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) was added and themixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. The reaction mixturewas evaporated in vacuo until dryness. The crude product was purified bypreparative LC (irregular silica, 15-40 μm, 40 g, liquid loading, mobilephase gradient DCM/MeOH from 100/0 to 90/10) to give a sticky solid.This solid was triturated in Et₂O, then dissolved in DCM and washedtwice with water, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to drynessto give 0.072 g of a white solid. That solid was dissolved in ethanoland evaporated to dryness, then successively triturated in Et₂O andiPr₂O/EtOH (9:1). The resulting solid was purified by preparative LC(spherical C18 silica, 25 μm, 40 g YMC-ODS-25, dry loading (Celite®),mobile phase gradient: 0.2% aq. (NH₄HCO₃)/MeCN from 30:70 to 0:100 in 6CV) and finally triturated in Et₂O to give 0.032 g of Compound 89 as awhite solid (25%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 9.06 (s, 1H), 8.47 (br d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H),8.37 (br t, J=5.6 Hz, 1H), 7.66 (d, J=9.6 Hz, 1H), 7.44 (br d, J=9.6 Hz,1H), 7.25 (d, J=4.8 Hz, 2H), 7.19 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 6.41 (br d, J=8.1Hz, 2H), 4.41 (br d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 3.92 (s, 2H), 3.71 (s, 2H),3.48-3.43 (m, 1H), 2.96 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.62-2.57 (m, 2H), 2.35-2.29(m, 2H), 1.25 (br t, J=7.3 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 90

Preparation of Intermediate CT

A solution of 2-Boc-2,6-diazaspiro[3.3]heptane oxalate (CAS[1041026-71-4], 2.0 g, 6.73 mmol), 4-Bromobenzonitrile (CAS [623-00-7],1.84 g, 10.1 mmol) and sodium terbutoxide (2.59 g, 26.9 mmol) in1,4-dioxane (70 mL) was degassed. Then, palladium acetate (0.151 g,0.673 mmol) and Xantphos (0.389 g, 0.673 mmol) were added, the mixturewas purged again with N₂ and stirred at 100° C. for 3 h. The mixture wascooled down to room temperature and filtered on a pad of Celite®. Thecake was washed with EtOAc and the filtrate was evaporated in vacuo. Thecrude product was purified by preparative LC (irregular silica, 15-40μm, 120 g, dry loading (Celite®), mobile phase gradient Heptane/EtOAcfrom 95/5 to 60/40) to give 0.919 g of intermediate CT as a white solid(48%).

Preparation of Intermediate CU

A mixture of intermediate CT (0.5 g, 1.67 mmol) in formic acid (5 mL)was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The mixture was evaporated invacuo to give 0.526 g of intermediate 44 as an orange gum whichcrystallized on standing (quant.).

Preparation of Intermediate CV

To a solution of intermediate CU (0.25 mg, 0.715 mmol) and triethylamine(0.5 mL, 3.60 mmol) in DCM (7.5 mL) at 0° C. was added acetic anhydride(0.075 mL, 0.79 mmol) and the mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 2 h. Themixture was diluted with DCM and washed with water. The organic layerwas dried over MgSO₄, filtered off and evaporated in vacuo. The crudeproduct was purified by preparative LC (irregular silica, 15-40 μm, 24g, liquid loading (DCM), mobile phase gradient DCM/MeOH from 99/1 to94/6) to give 0.167 g of intermediate CV as a white solid (97%).

Preparation of Intermediate CW

In an autoclave, to a solution of intermediate CV (0.167 g, 0.69 mmol)in ammonia 7N in MeOH (4 mL) was added Raney Nickel 0.2 g, 3.4 mmol) andthe mixture was stirred at room temperature under 3 bar of H₂ for 2 h.The mixture was filtered off and evaporated in vacuo to give 0.153 g ofintermediate CW as a white solid (90%).

Preparation of Compound 90

Triethylamine (0.29 mL, 2.09 mmol) and HATU (0.285 g, 0.75 mmol) wereadded successively to a solution of6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[3,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid (CAS[1216142-18-5], 0.163 g, 0.68 mmol) in DMF (4 mL). The resulting mixturewas stirred at room temperature for 30 min., then a solution ofintermediate CW (0.178 g, 0.726 mmol) in DMF (3 mL) was added and themixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. The reaction mixturewas evaporated in vacuo until dryness to give 0.717 g as a pale yellowsolid. The crude product was purified by preparative LC (Irregularsilica 15-40 μm, 50 g, dry loading (Celite®), mobile phase gradientDCM/MeOH from 99/1% to 95/5) to obtain 0.351 g as a yellow gum. Theproduct was purified by Reverse phase (Stationary phase: YMC-actusTriart-C18 10 μm 30×150 mm, Mobile phase: Gradient from 70% aq. (NH₄HCO₃0.2%), 30% MeCN to 100% MeCN) to give 0.234 g of a white solid which wastriturated in Et₂O, filtered and dried under high vacuum to afford 0.222g of Compound 90 as a white solid (72%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 9.06 (s, 1H), 8.41 (br s, 1H), 7.67 (d,J=9.5 Hz, 1H), 7.46 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.20 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 2H), 6.43 (d,J=8.2 Hz, 2H), 4.41 (br d, J=5.0 Hz, 2H), 4.28 (s, 2H), 4.00 (s, 2H),3.91 (s, 4H), 2.96 (q, J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 1.75 (s, 3H), 1.25 (t, J=7.6 Hz,3H)

Synthesis of Compound 91

Preparation of Intermediate CX

To a solution of intermediate CU (0.25 g, 0.715 mmol) and triethylamine(0.50 mL, 3.60 mmol) in DCM (7.5 mL) at 0° C. was added benzoyl chloride(0.09 mL, 0.78 mmol) and the mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 2 h. Themixture was diluted with DCM and washed with water. The organic layerwas dried over MgSO₄, filtered off and evaporated in vacuo. The crudeproduct was purified by preparative LC (irregular silica, 15-40 μm, 24g, Grace, liquid loading (DCM), mobile phase gradient: from DCM 99%,MeOH 1% to DCM 96%, MeOH 4%) to give 0.128 g of intermediate CX as awhite solid (59%).

Preparation of Intermediate CY

In an autoclave, to a solution of intermediate CX (0.128 g, 0.422 mmol)in ammonia 7N in MeOH (2.4 mL) was added Raney Nickel (0.12 g, 2.1 mmol)and the mixture was stirred at room temperature under 3 bar for 2 h. Themixture was filtered off and evaporated in vacuo to give 0.108 g ofintermediate CY as a colourless oil which crystallized on standing(83%).

Preparation of Compound 91

Diisopropylethylamine (0.168 mL, 0.99 mmol) and HATU (0.168 g, 0.44mmol) were added successively to a solution of-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[3,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid (CAS[1216142-18-5], 0.09 g, 0.38 mmol) in DMF (2.5 mL). The resultingmixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min., then a solution ofintermediate CY (0.13 g, 0.42 mmol) in DMF (1.7 mL) was added and themixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. The reaction mixturewas evaporated in vacuo until dryness to give 0.52 g as an orange gum.The crude product was purified by preparative LC (Irregular silica 15-40μm, 40 g, dry loading (Celite®), mobile phase gradient DCM/MeOH from99/1 to 94/6) to obtain 0.137 g as a yellow gum. The product waspurified by Reverse phase (Stationary phase: YMC-actus Triart-C18 10 μm30×150 mm, Mobile phase: Gradient from 60% aq. (NH₄HCO₃ 0.2%), 40% MeCNto 100% MeCN) to give 0.109 g of a colorless oil which was triturated inEt₂O, filtered and dried under high vacuum to afford 0.095 g of Compound91 as a white solid (49%).

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 9.06 (s, 1H), 8.40 (br t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H),7.68-7.62 (m, 3H), 7.54-7.44 (m, 4H), 7.20 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 2H), 6.43 (d,J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 4.49 (s, 2H), 4.41 (d, J=5.7 Hz, 2H), 4.24 (s, 2H),3.99-3.90 (br q, 4H), 2.96 (q, J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 1.25 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 92

Preparation of Intermediate CZ

In an autoclave, to a solution of intermediate F (1.57 g, 5.26 mmol) inammonia 7M in MeOH (50 mL) was added Raney Nickel (1.4 g, 23.9 mmol) andthe mixture was hydrogenated at room temperature under 3 bar over theweekend (after 3 h, all hydrogen was consumed. The autoclave wasrefilled to 3 bar of H₂). The mixture was filtered off and evaporated invacuo. The residual grey gum was solubilized in EtOAc, stirred withSiliaMetS® Imidazole (1 eq. w/w) for 1 h then filtered over a pad ofCelite®. The filtrate was evaporated in vacuo to afford 1.29 g ofintermediate CZ as a white solid.

Preparation of Intermediate DA

To a solution of 6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[3,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylicacid (CAS [1216142-18-5], 0.4 g, 1.67 mmol) in diisopropylethylamine(0.74 mL, 4.35 mmol) and DMF (15 mL) was added HATU (0.7 g, 1.84 mmol)and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20 min. IntermediateCZ (505 mg, 1.67 mmol) was added then the mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 1 h. The mixture was evaporated in vacuo to give a browngum. The residue was purified by preparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40μm, 50 g, dry loading (Celite®), Heptane/EtOAc/MeOH (9:1) from 85/15 to35/65) to give 0.784 g of intermediate DA as a white solid (92%).

Preparation of Intermediate DB

To a solution of intermediate DA (0.784 g, 1.54 mmol) in MeOH (16 mL)was added Chlorotrimethylsilane (1 mL, 7.92 mmol) and the mixture wasstirred at room temperature for 16 h. The mixture was evaporated invacuo to afford 0.79 g of intermediate DA as pale yellow foam (crudeused as such in next step).

Preparation of Compound 92

Trifluoroacetic anhydride (0.235 mL, 1.69 mmol) was added at 0° C. to asolution of intermediate DB (0.79 g, 80%, 1.54 mmol) and triethylamine(1.1 mL, 7.91 mmol) in DCM (9 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at0° C. for 1 h then, at room temperature for 1 h. The reaction mixturewas quenched with NaHCO₃ sat. and extracted with DCM (twice). Theorganic layer was dried over MgSO₄, filtered off then evaporated invacuo 0.75 g of an off-white foam. The residue was purified bypreparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 50 g, dry loading (Celite®),Heptane/EtOAc/MeOH (9:1) from 90/10 to 60/40) to give 0.643 g of a whitefoam.

The residue was purified by reverse phase (spherical C18, 25 μm, 120 gYMC-ODS-25, dry loading (Celite®), mobile phase gradient: from 35%aq.(NH4HCO3 0.2%), 65% MeCN to 100% MeCN) and clean fractions weredirectly freeze-dried. The fluffy solid was solubilized in MeCN thenevaporated under vacuum to give a colorless oil. This oil was trituratedin Et₂O and evaporated under vacuum to afford 0.593 g of Compound 92 asa white solid (76% over 2 steps).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 9.07 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.46 (br t,J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.66 (d, J=9.6 Hz, 1H), 7.45 (dd, J=9.1, 2.0 Hz, 1H),7.30 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 2H), 7.20 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 2H), 4.56 (s, 1H), 4.49 (d,J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 4.33 (s, 1H), 4.23 (s, 1H), 4.01 (s, 1H), 3.41-3.33 (m,1H), 2.99 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.68-2.55 (m, 2H), 2.33-2.25 (m, 2H), 1.26(t, J=7.6 Hz, 4H)

Synthesis of Compound 93

A solution of intermediate L (0.085 g, 0.299 mmol) and HATU (0.17 g,0.447 mmol) in diisopropylethylamine (0.13 mL, 0.764 mmol) and DMF (2mL) was stirred at room temperature for 30 min. Then, intermediate Q(0.085 g, 0.304 mmol) in DMF (1.4 mL) was added and the mixture wasstirred at room temperature for 3 h. The mixture was evaporated in vacuoto give 0.543 g of a brown gum. The residue was purified by preparativeLC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 30 g, dry loading (Celite®),

Heptane/EtOAc/MeOH (9:1) from 90/10 to 45/55) to give 0.088 g of ayellow gum (which crystallized on standing). The residue was trituratedin Et₂O/EtOH (9:1), filtered off and dried under vacuum (50° C., 16 h)to give 0.064 g of Compound 93 as a pale yellow solid (36%).

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 9.38 (s, 1H), 8.67 (s, 1H), 8.51 (t,J=5.6 Hz, 1H), 7.21-7.15 (m, 4H), 6.68 (br t, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 6.44 (br d,J=8.1 Hz, 4H), 4.41 (br d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 3.95 (br s, 8H), 3.00 (q,J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.26 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H).

Synthesis of Compound 94

Preparation of Intermediate DC

Accordingly, intermediate DC was prepared in the same way asintermediate BV starting from intermediate G (0.315 g, 1.34 mmol) andbromobenzene affording 0.245 g, 66%.

Preparation of Intermediate DD

Accordingly, intermediate DD was prepared in the same way asintermediate CZ starting from intermediate DC (0.14 g, 0.51 mmol) togive 0.135 g, 83%.

Preparation of Compound 94

A solution of intermediate L (0.135 g, 0.475 mmol) and HATU (0.27 g,0.71 mmol) in diisopropylethylamine (200 μL, 1.18 mmol) and DMF (2.5 mL)was stirred at room temperature for 30 min. Then, intermediate 52 (0.135g, 0.485 mmol) in DMF (2.5 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred atroom temperature for 3 h. The mixture was evaporated in vacuo to give0.848 g of a brown oil. The residue was purified by preparative LC(irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 40 g, dry loading (Celite®),Heptane/EtOAc/MeOH (9:1) from 80/20 to 35/65) to give 0.159 g of a paleyellow solid. The solid was triturated in Et₂O/EtOH (9:1), filtered offand dried under vacuum (50° C., 16 h) to give 0.118 g of a white solid.This solid was purified by Reverse phase (Stationary phase: YMC-actusTriart-C18 10 μm 30×150 mm, Mobile phase: Gradient from 40% aq.(NH₄HCO₃0.2%), 60% ACN to 100% ACN) then dried under vacuum (60° C., 16 h) togive 0.076 g of Compound 94 as a white solid (29%).

1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.40 (d, J=3.0 Hz, 1H), 8.68 (d, J=2.5Hz, 1H), 8.57 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.32 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 2H), 7.22 (d, J=8.1Hz, 2H), 7.15 (t, J=7.8 Hz, 2H), 6.65 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 1H), 6.41 (d, J=7.6Hz, 2H), 4.51 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 3.93 (s, 2H), 3.71 (s, 2H), 3.42 (quin,J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 3.03 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.61-2.54 (m, 2H), 2.34-2.23 (m,2H), 1.28 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H).

Synthesis of Compound 95 and Compound 96

Preparation of Intermediate DE

A solution of 2-Boc-2-azaspiro[3.3]heptan-6-one (CAS [1181816-12-5], 0.5g, 2.37 mmol), 1,3-propanediol (0.26 mL, 3.55 mmol), ethylorthoformate(0.39 mL, 2.37 mmol) and zirconium chloride (0.028 g, 0.118 mmol) inanhydrous DCM (10 mL) was stirred under N₂ for 2 h at room temperature.After 2 h, 0.25 eq of ethylorthoformate (0.099 mL, 0.59 mmol) and 0.5eq. of 1,3-propanediol (0.09 mL, 1.18 mmol) were added. After 5 h: thereaction mixture was quenched with water (30 mL) and extracted with DCM(30 mL). The organic phase was washed with water, dried over MgSO₄,filtered and evaporated to dryness to give 0.633 g of intermediate DE asa colorless oil.

Preparation of Intermediate DF

Accordingly, intermediate DF was prepared in the same way asintermediate DB, starting from intermediate DE (0.63 g, 2.35 mmol)affording 0.431 g, 2.1 mmol as an hydrochloride salt.

Preparation of Intermediate DG

A mixture of intermediate DF (0.426 g, 2.07 mmol), 4-Fluorobenzonitrile(0.376 g, 3.11 mmol) and potassium carbonate (0.859 g, 6.21 mmol) inanhydrous DMSO (12 mL) was heated at 120° C. using a single modemicrowave (Biotage initiator60) with a power output ranging from 0 to400 W for 1 h [fixed hold time]. The reaction mixture was quenched withwater (30 mL), extracted with EtOAc (2×30 mL). The combined organicphases were washed with water (2×30 mL) and brine (2×20 mL), dried overMgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness to give a green solid. Theresidue was purified by preparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 80 g,Grace, dry loading (Silica), Heptane/EtOAc from 90/10 to 50/50) to give0.369 g of intermediate DG as white solid (66%).

Preparation of Intermediate DH

Accordingly, intermediate DH was prepared in the same way asintermediate CZ starting from intermediate DG (0.334 g, 1.24 mmol) togive 0.297 g, 88%.

Preparation of Compound 95

A solution of 6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[3-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid(CAS [1216142-18-5], 0.225 g, 0.939 mmol) and HATU (0.39 g, 1.03 mmol)in triethylamine (0.39 mL, 2.81 mmol) and DMF (6 mL) was stirred at roomtemperature for 30 min. Then, intermediate DH (0.27 g, 0.984 mmol) inDMF (5 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for3 hours. The mixture was evaporated in vacuo to give 1.22 g of an orangegum. The residue was purified by preparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40μm, 50 g, merck, dry loading (Celite®), Heptane/EtOAc/MeOH (9:1) from90/10 to 45/55) to give 0.483 g as a white foam (96%).

51 mg of the residue was solubilized in MeCN, washed with pentane(twice) and evaporated in vacuo. The residual colorless oil wastriturated in Et₂O, filtered off and dried under high vacuum (50° C., 16h) to afford 43 mg of Compound 95 as a white solid.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 9.05 (s, 1H), 8.37 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H),7.65 (d, J=9.6 Hz, 1H), 7.44 (dd, J=9.6, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.17 (d, J=8.1 Hz,2H), 6.39 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 4.40 (d, J=6.1 Hz, 2H), 3.77-3.72 (m, 8H),2.95 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.39 (s, 4H), 1.60-1.55 (m, 2H), 1.24 (t, J=7.6Hz, 3H)

Preparation of Compound 96

A solution of Compound 95 (0.35 g, 0.673 mmol) and para-toluenesulfonicacid (0.013 g, 0.0673 mmol) in acetone (7.5 mL) and water (1.8 mL) washeated at 100° C. using a single mode microwave (Biotage initiator60)with a power output ranging from 0 to 400 W for 2 h [fixed hold time].The mixture was heated again at 100° C. using a single mode microwave(Biotage initiator60) with a power output ranging from 0 to 400 W for 2h [fixed hold time]. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc, washed with aq.NaHCO₃ sat., brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered off and evaporated invacuo to afford 0.301 g of a yellow solid. The residue was purified bypreparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 24 g, Grace, dry loading(Celite®), Heptane/EtOAc/MeOH (9:1) from 80/20 to 40/60) to give 0.275 gof an off-white solid. The solid was triturated in Et₂O (3 times) thenin Et₂O/EtOH (9:1, twice) and filtered off to afford 0.256 g a whitesolid.

The solid was purified by preparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 24g, Grace, dry loading (Celite®), Heptane/EtOAc/MeOH (9:1) from 90/10 to50/50) and clean fractions were directly combined to give 0.151 g of awhite solid. The solid was purified by reverse phase (spherical C18, 25μm, 40 g YMC-ODS-25, dry loading (Celite), mobile phase gradient: from75% aq.(NH₄HCO₃ 0.2%), 25% MeCN to 35% aq.(NH₄HCO₃ 0.2%), 65% MeCN) andclean fractions were freeze-dried to afford 0.045 g of Compound 96 awhite solid.

1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.06 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.39 (br s, 1H),7.66 (d, J=9.6 Hz, 1H), 7.44 (dd, J=9.6, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.20 (d, J=8.08Hz, 2H), 6.45 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 2H), 4.41 (br d, J=4.6 Hz, 2H), 3.96 (s,4H), 3.35-3.29 (m, 4H), 2.96 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.25 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

The Following Compounds were also prepared in accordance with theprocedures herein:

Compound No Structure  97

 98

 99

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

Synthesis of Compound 117, Compound 130 & Compound 131

Preparation of Intermediate DI

A suspension of silver triflate (3.6 g, 14.1 mmol), Selectfluor® (2.49g, 7.03 mmol), potassium fluoride (1.09 g, 18.8 mmol) and6-oxo-2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane-2-carboxylate (CAS [1147557-97-8], 1.00 g,4.69 mmol) was purged with N₂. Then, EtOAc (24 mL), 2-fluoropyridine(1.21 mL, 14.1 mmol) and trifluoromethyltrimethylsilane 2M in THE (7.03mL, 14.1 mmol) were added, the mixture was purged again and theresulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 days. Thereaction mixture was then filtered on Celite® and evaporated to dryness.The crude product was purified by preparative LC (irregular silica,15-40 μm, 50 g, Merck, dry loading (Celite®), mobile phase gradient:Heptane/EtOAc from 90/10 to 50/50) to give 0.64 g of intermediate DI asa white crystals (49%).

Preparation of Intermediate DJ

Chlorotrimethylsilane (0.9 mL, 7.12 mmol) was added to a solution ofintermediate DI (0.4 g, 1.42 mmol) in anhydrous methanol (9 mL) and themixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture wasevaporated in vacuo to give 0.308 g of intermediate DJ as a pale pinkgum which crystallized on standing (quant.).

Preparation of Intermediate DK

A suspension of intermediate DJ (0.308 g, 1.42 mmol),4-Fluorobenzonitrile (CAS [1194-02-1], 0.346 g, 2.83 mmol) and potassiumcarbonate (0.782 g, 5.66 mmol) in DMSO (7 mL) was heated at 120° C.using a single mode microwave (Biotage Initiator60) with a power outputranging from 0 to 400 W for 30 min [fixed hold time]. The mixture wasdiluted in EtOAc, washed with water (3×), brine (3×), dried over MgSO₄,filtered off and evaporated. The crude product was purified bypreparative LC (irregular silica, 15-40 μm, 24 g, Grace, dry loading(Celite®), mobile phase gradient: Heptane/EtOAc from 95/5 to 60/40) togive 0.101 g of intermediate DK as a white solid (25%).

Preparation of Intermediate DL

In an autoclave, to a solution of intermediate DK (0.101 g, 0.36 mmol)in ammonia 7N in MeOH (1.8 mL) was added Raney Nickel (˜0.1 g, 1.7 mmol)and the mixture was stirred at room temperature under 3 bar of H₂ for 2hours. The mixture was filtered off and evaporated in vacuo. Thefiltrate was taken-up in EtOAc and filtered on a pad of Celite®. Thefiltrate was evaporated in vacuo to give 0.09 g of intermediate DL as acolorless oil (87%).

Preparation of Compound 117

Diisopropylethylamine (0.132 mL, 0.78 mmol) and HATU (125 mg, 0.33 mmol)were added successively to a solution of6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[1,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid (CAS[1216142-18-5], 0.072 g, 0.30 mmol) in DMF (2 mL). The resulting mixturewas stirred at room temperature for 30 min., then a solution ofintermediate DL (0.09 g, 0.31 mmol) in DMF (1 mL) was added and themixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. The reaction mixturewas evaporated in vacuo until dryness to give 0.26 g as brown oil. Thecrude product was purified by preparative LC (Irregular silica 15-40 μm,12 g Grace, dry loading (Celite®), mobile phase gradientHeptane/EtOAc/MeOH (9:1) from 90/10 to 50/50) to obtain 0.126 g as ayellow solid. The product was purified by Reverse phase (spherical C18,25 μm, 120 g YMC-ODS-25, dry loading (Celite®), mobile phase gradient:from 30% aq. (NH₄HCO₃ 0.2%), 70% MeCN to 100% MeCN) to give 0.107 g of awhite solid which was triturated in Et₂O, filtered and dried under highvacuum to afford 0.085 g of Compound 117 as a white solid (57%).

1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.05 (s, 1H), 8.37 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 1H),7.65 (d, J=9.6 Hz, 1H), 7.44 (dd, J=9.6, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.18 (d, J=8.6 Hz,2H), 6.38 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 4.79 (m, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 4.40 (d, J=5.6 Hz,2H), 3.78 (d, J=11.6 Hz, 4H), 2.95 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.68-2.55 (m, 2H),2.45-2.38 (m, 2H), 1.24 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

Preparation of Compound 130

Compound 130 was prepared in the same way as Compound 117, starting fromintermediate CI and intermediate DL. The crude product was purified bypreparative LC (Regular SiOH 30 μm, 12 g Interchim, dry loading(Celite®), mobile phase gradient Heptane/EtOAc/MeOH from 70:25:5 to40:50:10) to give 0.099 g of Compound 130 as an off-white solid (31%).

1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 8.09 (t, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.11 (d, J=8.5Hz, 2H), 6.36 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 4.79 (quint., J=7.3 Hz, 1H), 4.28 (d,J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 3.96 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 2H), 3.78 (s, 2H), 3.75 (s, 2H),2.70-2.63 (m, 4H), 2.58 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.47-2.39 (m, 2H), 1.86-1.75(m, 4H), 1.08 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

Preparation of Compound 131

To a solution of intermediate L (250 mg, 1.03 mmol) in triethylamine(0.4 mL, 2.88 mmol) and DCM (8.5 mL) were added EDCI (300 mg, 1.57 mmol)and HOBt (210 mg, 1.55 mmol) and the mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 30 min. Intermediate DL (312 mg, 1.09 mmol) in DCM (2mL) was added and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h.The mixture was then washed with water (2×) and brine. The organic layerwas dried over MgSO₄, filtered, and evaporated to dryness. The crudeproduct was purified by preparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 40 g,Grace, dry loading (Celite®), mobile phase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from80/20 to 20/80) to give a pale yellow solid, which was triturated inethanol and filtered off to afford 0.248 g of Compound 131 as a whitesolid (49%).

1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.38 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.67 (d, J=2.8Hz, 1H), 8.49 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.19 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 2H), 6.38 (d, J=8.5Hz, 2H), 4.79 (quin, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 4.40 (br d, J=5.7 Hz, 2H), 3.7 (s,2H), 3.76 (s, 2H), 2.99 (q, J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.67-2.63 (m, 2H), 2.43-2.39(m, 2H), 1.26 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 132

Preparation of Intermediate DM

A suspension of intermediate G (0.238 g, 1.01 mmol), 2-fluoropyrazine(0.123 mL, 1.52 mmol) and potassium carbonate (420 mg, 3.04 mmol) inDMSO (6.2 mL) was heated at 120° C. using a single mode microwave(Biotage initiator60) with a power output ranging from 0 to 400 W for 1h [fixed hold time]. The reaction mixture was evaporated in Genevac andpurified by preparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 40 g, Merck, dryloading (silica), mobile phase gradient from DCM/MeOH from 100/0 to90/10) to give 0.194 g of intermediate DM as a yellow solid (69%).

Preparation of Intermediate DN

Accordingly, intermediate DN was prepared in the same was asintermediate DL starting from intermediate DM, yielding 0.169 g, 88%.

Preparation of Compound 132

Diisopropylethylamine (0.24 mL, 1.41 mmol) and HATU (0.227 g, 0.60 mmol)were added successively to a solution of6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[1,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid (CAS[1216142-18-5], 0.125 g, 0.54 mmol) in DMF (3.2 mL). The resultingmixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h, then a solution ofintermediate DN (0.152 g, 0.54 mmol) in DMF (3.2 mL) was added and themixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. The reaction mixturewas evaporated to dryness. The residue was dissolved in DCM and washedwith NaHCO₃ 1% (2×), water (2×) and brine, dried over MgSO₄, filteredand evaporated to dryness. The crude product was purified by preparativeLC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 40 g, Grace, dry loading (Silica), mobilephase gradient DCM/MeOH from 100/0 to 90/10) to give a brown solid,which was triturated in Et₂O to afford 0.121 g of Compound 132 as anoff-white solid (46%).

1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.07 (s, 1H), 8.48 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H),8.02 (s, 1H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 7.82 (d, J=2.8 Hz, 1H), 7.67 (d, J=9.6 Hz,1H), 7.46 (dd, J=9.6, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.31 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 7.23 (d,J=8.1 Hz, 2H), 4.50 (d, J=6.1 Hz, 2H), 4.17 (s, 2H), 3.96 (s, 2H), 3.42(quin, J=8.9 Hz, 1H), 2.99 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.63-2.57 (m, 2H),2.33-2.27 (m, 2H), 1.27 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 125 & Compound 133

Preparation of Intermediate DO

A solution of 2,2-difluoro-7-azaspiro[3.5]nonane hydrochloride (CAS[1263181-82-5], 0.3 g, 1.52 mmol), 4-Bromobenzonitrile (0.414 g, 2.28mmol) and sodium terbutoxide (0.583 g, 6.07 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (16 mL)was degassed under N₂. Then, Palladium II acetate (0.034 g, 0.152 mmol)and Xantphos (0.088 g, 0.152 mmol) were added, the mixture was purgedagain with N₂ and heated to 120° C. overnight. The mixture was cooled toroom temperature and filtered over a pad of Celite®. The cake was washedwith EtOAc and the filtrate was evaporated in vacuo. The crude waspurified by preparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 24 g, Grace, dryloading (SiOH), mobile phase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 90/10 to 50/50to obtain 0.343 g of intermediate DO as yellow solid (86%).

Preparation of Intermediate DP

Accordingly, intermediate DP was prepared in the same was asintermediate DL starting from intermediate DO, yielding 0.312 g, 90%.

Preparation of Compound 125

Diisopropylethylamine (0.21 mL, 1.20 mmol) and HATU (238 mg, 0.625 mmol)were added successively to a solution of6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[1,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid (CAS[1216142-18-5], 0.111 g, 0.481 mmol) in DMF (13 mL). The resultingmixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min, before the additionof intermediate DP (0.128 g, 0.481 mmol) and the mixture was stirred atroom temperature for 1 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAcand washed with an aq. sat. NaHCO₃ solution (twice) and brine (twice).The organic phase was dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated todryness to give 0.269 g. The crude was purified by preparative LC(Irregular SiOH 15-40 μm, 40 g Grace Resolv, dry loading (SiOH), mobilephase gradient: Heptane/EtOAc from 90/10 to 50/50) to obtain 0.199 g aswhite brown solid. The residue was dissolved in EtOAc and washed with 1%aq. NaHCO₃ (2×), water and brine (2×), dried over MgSO₄, filtered andevaporated to obtain 0.183 g. It was triturated in iPr₂O, filtered anddried to obtain 0.146 g as white solid. It was dissolved in EtOH andevaporated to dryness (3×) and dried under vacuo overnight to obtain0.144 g of Compound 125 as white solid (63%).

1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.06 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 8.40 (t, J=5.8Hz, 1H), 7.66 (d, J=9.6 Hz, 1H), 7.45 (dd, J=9.3, 2.3 Hz, 1H), 7.21 (d,J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.92 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 4.42 (d, J=6.1 Hz, 2H), 3.10-3.07(m, 4H), 2.96 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.39 (t, J=13.1 Hz, 4H), 1.70-1.67 (m,4H), 1.25 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

Preparation of Compound 133

Compound 133 was prepared in the same way as Compound 125, starting fromintermediate L and intermediate DP. The crude product was purified bypreparative LCs (Irregular SiOH 15-40 μm, 40 g Grace, dry loading(silica), mobile phase gradient Heptane/(AcOEt/MeOH 9/1) from 90/10 to60/40; then spherical C18 25 μm, 40 g YMC-ODS-25, dry loading (Celite®),mobile phase gradient: 0.2% aq. NH₄HCO₃/MeCN from 65/35 to 25/75) togive 0.083 g of Compound 133 as a white solid (36%). 1H NMR (500 MHz,DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.39 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.67 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.51 (t,J=5.7 Hz, 1H), 7.21 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 6.92 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 4.42 (d,J=5.7 Hz, 2H), 3.10-3.06 (m, 4H), 3.00 (q, J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.39 (t,J=13.5 Hz, 4H), 1.71-1.67 (m, 4H), 1.26 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 134

Preparation of Intermediate DQ

Palladium acetate (0.107 g, 117 μmol) and Xantphos (0.182 g, 293 μmol)were added to a mixture of intermediate G (0.55 g, 2.34 mmol),5-bromopyrimidine (0.373 g, 2.34 mmol) and sodium t-butoxide (0.676 g,7.03 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (8.3 mL). The atmosphere was evacuated andbackfilled with N₂. The reaction mixture was heated at 100° C. for 5 h.After cooling to room temperature, the reaction mixture was diluted withAcOEt and DCM and filtered over a pad of Celite®. The filtrate wasevaporated to dryness. The crude mixture was purified by preparative LC(irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 120 g, Grace, dry loading (silica), mobilephase gradient DCM/MeOH from 100/0 to 95/5) to give 0.306 g ofintermediate DQ as a yellow solid (47%).

Preparation of Intermediate DR

Accordingly, intermediate DR was prepared in the same was asintermediate DL starting from intermediate DQ, yielding 0.298 g, 96% asa yellow solid.

Preparation of Compound 134

Compound 134 was prepared in the same way as Compound 132, starting from6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[1,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid CAS[1216142-18-5] and intermediate DR. The crude product was purified bypreparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 80 g, Grace, dry loading(silica), mobile phase gradient DCM/MeOH from 100/0 to 90/10) to give0.268 g of Compound 134 as a white solid (56%).

1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.08 (s, 1H), 8.53 (s, 1H), 8.48 (t,J=5.6 Hz, 1H), 8.03 (s, 2H), 7.68 (d, J=9.5 Hz, 1H), 7.47 (dd, J=9.5,1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.32 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 7.23 (d, J=7.88 Hz, 2H), 4.51 (d,J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 4.09 (s, 2H), 3.88 (s, 2H), 3.46-3.36 (m, 1H), 3.00 (q,J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.62-2.58 (m, 2H), 2.33-2.28 (m, 2H), 1.29-1.24 (t, J=7.6Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 135 & Compound 136

Preparation of Intermediate DS

A solution of 2,2-Difluoro-2-(fluorosulfonyl)acetic acid (CAS[1717-59-5], 1.25 g, 7.03 mmol) in Acetonitrile (6 mL) was added over 1h30 to a solution of tert-Butyl6-hydroxy-2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane-2-carboxylate (CAS [1147557-97-8], 1.00g, 4.69 mmol) and copper iodide (0.179 g, 0.94 mmol) in acetonitrile (12mL) at 50° C. under N₂. The reaction mixture was further stirred at 50°C. for 30 min, then evaporated to dryness. The crude product waspurified by preparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 80 g, Grace, dryloading (silica), mobile phase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 100/0 to70/30) to give 0.788 g of intermediate DS as a white solid (64%).

Preparation of Intermediate DT

Accordingly, intermediate DT was prepared in the same way asintermediate DJ starting from intermediate DS yielding 0.563 g,quantitative, as a colorless oil, used as such.

Preparation of Intermediate DU

Accordingly, intermediate DU was prepared in the same way asintermediate DK starting from intermediate DT yielding 0.445 g, 60% as awhite solid.

Preparation of Intermediate DV

Accordingly, intermediate DV was prepared in the same was asintermediate DL starting from intermediate DU yielding 0.433 g, 96% as acolorless oil.

Preparation of Compound 135

Compound 135 was prepared in the same way as Compound 132, starting from6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[1,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid CAS[1216142-18-5] and intermediate DV. The crude product was purified bypreparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 80 g, Grace, dry loading(silica), mobile phase gradient: from DCM 100%, MeOH 0% to DCM 95%, MeOH5% to give 0.176 g of Compound 135 as a white solid (53%).

1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.05 (s, 1H), 8.38 (br t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H),7.66 (d, J=9.5 Hz, 1H), 7.45 (dd, J=9.5, 1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.18 (d, J=8.2 Hz,2H), 6.62 (t, J=76 Hz, 1H), 6.38 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 4.54 (quin, J=7.2Hz, 1H), 4.40 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 3.78 (s, 2H), 3.74 (s, 2H), 2.95 (q,J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.59-2.55 (m, 2H), 2.30-2.26 (m, 2H), 2.28, 1.24 (t,J=7.4 Hz, 3H)

Preparation of Compound 136

Compound 136 was prepared in the same way as Compound 135, starting fromintermediate L and intermediate DV. The crude product was purified bypreparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 80 g, Grace, dry loading(silica), mobile phase gradient DCM/MeOH from 100/0 to 90/10) to give0.127 g of Compound 136 as a white solid (38%).

1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.38 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.67 (d, J=2.5Hz, 1H), 8.48 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.18 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.62 (t, J=76Hz, 1H), 6.37 (t, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 4.54 (t, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 4.40 (d, J=6.1Hz, 2H), 3.78 (s, 2H), 3.74 (s, 2H), 2.99 (q, J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.59-2.54(m, 2H), 2.30-2.25 (m, 2H), 1.26 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 137

Preparation of Intermediate DW

Accordingly, intermediate DW was prepared in the same way asintermediate DQ starting from intermediate G and4-bromodifluoromethoxybenzene CAS [5905-69-1], yielding 0.13 g as awhite solid (30%).

Preparation of Intermediate DX

Accordingly, intermediate DX was prepared in the same way asintermediate DR starting from intermediate DW yielding 0.264 g as awhite solid (90%).

Preparation of Compound 137

Compound 137 was prepared in the same way as Compound 132, starting from6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[1,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid CAS[1216142-18-5] and intermediate DX. The crude product was purified bypreparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 40 g, Grace, dry loading(silica), mobile phase gradient DCM/MeOH from 100/0 to 90/10) to give0.132 g of Compound 137 as a white solid (69%).

1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.07 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 1H), 8.47 (t, J=6.1Hz, 1H), 7.67 (d, J=9.6 Hz, 1H), 7.46 (dd, J=9.6, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.31 (d,J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.22 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 6.98 (t, J=76 Hz, 1H), 6.98 (d,J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 6.43 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 4.50 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 3.92 (s,2H), 3.71 (s, 2H), 3.46-3.36 (m, 1H), 2.99 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.59-2.54(m, 2H), 2.30-2.25 (m, 2H), 1.27 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 138 & Compound 139

Preparation of Intermediate DY

Ethyl 2-pentynoate (18 mL, 135 mmol) was added to a solution of1-aminopyridinium iodide (25 g, 113 mmol) and potassium carbonate (19 g,135 mmol) in DMF (250 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 48 h and evaporated to dryness. The residue wassolubilized in EtOAc and washed with brine (3×). The organic layer wasdried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness to give 14.5 g of abrown solid, which was triturated successively in Et₂O, and MeCN andfiltered to give 8.1 g of intermediate DY as an off-white solid. Thefiltrate was evaporated to dryness and purified by preparative LC(Regular SiOH 30 μm, 120 g Interchim, dry loading (Celite®), mobilephase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 100/0 to 70/30) to give additional 1.2g of intermediate 73 as a white solid (global yield: 38%).

Preparation of Intermediate DZ

Aqueous sodium hydroxide 8M (20 mL, 164 mmol) was added to a solution ofintermediate DY (7 g, 32.1 mmol) in THE (39 mL) and methanol (39 mL).The resulting mixture was stirred at 70° C. overnight. HCl (1M) wasadded to the mixture until pH-7-8. The resulting precipitate wasfiltered and dried under high vacuum to give 5.3 g of intermediate DZ asan off-white solid (87%).

Preparation of Compound 138

To a solution of intermediate DY (0.1 g, 0.52 mmol) and triethylamine(0.188 mL, 1.36 mmol) in DCM (6 mL) were added EDCI (0.152 g, 0.78 mmol)and HOBt (0.108 g, 0.78 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 30 min before the addition of Intermediate I (0.202 g,0.56 mmol), then stirred at room temperature for 4 h. The reactionmixture was washed with water (2×). The organic layer was dried overMgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The crude product waspurified by preparative LCs (Regular SiOH 30 μm, 25 g Interchim, dryloading (Celite®), mobile phase: Heptane/AcOEt/MeOH 100:35:5; thenspherical C18 25 μm, 40 g YMC-ODS-25, liquid loading (MeOH/MeCN), mobilephase gradient: 0.2% aq. NH₄HCO₃/MeCN from 50:50 to 0:100 then 100%MeCN) to give a white solid, further triturated in Et₂O to give 0.145 gof Compound 138 as a white solid (52%).

1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 8.68 (d, J=6.9 Hz, 1H), 8.18 (t, J=6.0Hz, 1H), 7.87 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.40-7.36 (m, 1H), 7.30 (d, J=8.2 Hz,2H), 7.21 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 7.14 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 6.95 (td, J=6.9,1.3 Hz, 1H), 6.45 (d, J=7.8 Hz, 2H), 4.45 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 3.96 (s,2H), 3.75 (s, 2H), 3.45-3.35 (m, 1H), 3.01 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.59-2.55(m, 2H), 2.31-2.25 (m, 2H), 1.25 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

Preparation of Compound 139

Compound 138 (0.1 g, 0.187 mmol) was dissolved in ethanol (1.3 mL) andtreated with Pd/C 10% (10 mg). The reaction was stirred under H₂ atatmospheric pressure at 60° C. for 16 h. The reaction mixture wasfiltered over Celite® and rinsed with EtOAc. The solvent was removedunder reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by preparative LC(irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 24 g, Grace, dry loading (silica), mobilephase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 70/30 to 10/90) and to give 0.065 g ofCompound 139 as white solid (65%).

1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 7.69 (br t, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.36 (d,J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 7.29 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.10 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 2H), 6.38 (d,J=8.2 Hz, 2H), 4.26 (d, J=5.7 Hz, 2H), 3.96 (br t, J=5.8 Hz, 2H), 3.91(s, 2H), 3.69 (s, 2H), 3.50-3.43 (m, 1 H), 2.84 (br t, J=6.1 Hz, 2H),2.67 (q, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.60-2.56 (m, 2H), 2.31-2.27 (m, 2H), 1.93-1.88(m, 2H), 1.76-1.72 (m, 2H), 1.09 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 140, Compound 141 & Compound 142

Preparation of Intermediate EA

Ethyl-2-butynoate (CAS [4341-76-8], 6.2 mL, 54.0 mmol) was added to asolution of 1-aminopyridinium iodide (CAS [6295-37-0], 10 g, 45 mmol)and potassium carbonate (7.5 g, 54 mmol) in DMF (100 mL). The resultingmixture was stirred at room temperature for 72 h. The mixture wasevaporated to dryness and the residue was solubilized in EtOAc andwashed with brine (3×). The organic layer was dried over MgSO₄, filteredand evaporated to dryness to give 5.1 g of intermediate EA as a brownsolid (55%).

Preparation of Intermediate EB

Accordingly, intermediate EB was prepared in the same way asintermediate DZ starting from intermediate EA yielding 3.7 g as anoff-white solid, 84%.

Preparation of Intermediate EC

A solution of intermediate EB (0.2 g, 1.14 mmol), HATU (0.475 g, 1.25mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (0.47 mL, 3.41 mmol) in DMF (15 mL) wasstirred at room temperature for 30 min before the addition of tert-butyl2-(aminomethyl)-7-azaspiro[3.5]nonane-7-carboxylate (CAS [1160247-15-3],0.303 g, 1.19 mmol) in DMF (5 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred atroom temperature for 2 h. The mixture was evaporated to dryness and theresidue was solubilized in EtOAc and washed with an aqueous solution ofNaHCO₃ 1% (2×), water (2×) and brine (2×). The organic layer was driedover MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The crude product waspurified by preparative LCs (Regular SiOH 30 μm, 12 g Interchim, dryloading (Celite®), mobile phase gradient: from Heptane/EtOAc/MeOH100:0:0 to 70:25:5; then spherical C18 25 μm, 40 g YMC-ODS-25, dryloading (Celite®), mobile phase gradient: 0.2% aq. NH₄HCO₃/MeOH from50:50 to 10:90 then 0.2% aq. NH₄HCO₃/MeOH 10:90) to give 0.318 g ofintermediate EC as a colorless oil (68%).

Preparation of Intermediate ED

HCl 3M in CPME (0.77 mL, 2.31 mmol) was added to a solution ofintermediate EC (0.318 g, 0.77 mmol) in methanol (6 mL) at 0° C. Theresulting mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature overnight.Additional HCl 3M in CPME (0.51 mL, 1.54 mmol) was added at 0° C. andthe mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature overnight. Themixture was evaporated to dryness to give 0.306 g of intermediate ED asa white solid (quant.).

Preparation of Compound 140

A mixture of intermediate ED (0.26 g, 0.745 mmol),4-bromotrifluoromethoxybenzene (0.166 mL, 1.12 mmol) and sodiumt-butoxide (0.286 g, 2.98 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (10 mL) was degassed byN₂ bubbling for 10 min before the addition of palladium acetate (0.016g, 75 μmol) and Xantphos (0.043 g, 75 μmol). The resulting mixture wasstirred at 100° C. overnight, then cooled to room temperature andfiltered through a pad of Celite®. The cake was washed with EtOAc andthe filtrate was evaporated to dryness. The residue was solubilized inEtOAc and washed with brine (2×). The organic layer was dried overMgSO₄, filtered and concentrated to dryness. The crude product waspurified by preparative LCs (Irregular SiOH 15-40 μm, 10 g Biotage,liquid loading (DCM), mobile phase gradient: from Heptane/EtOAc/MeOH80:17:3 to 60:35:5; then spherical C18 25 μm, 40 g YMC-ODS-25, dryloading (Celite®), mobile phase gradient: 0.2% aq. NH₄HCO₃/MeCN from70:30 to 0:100 in 10 CV, then 5 CV at 0.2% aq. NH₄HCO₃/MeCN 0:100) togive 0.062 g of Compound 140 as a white solid (18%).

1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 8.64 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 7.84 (d, J=8.8Hz, 1H), 7.60 (t, J=5.7 Hz, 1H), 7.37 (td, J=7.9, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 7.15 (d,J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 7.00-6.93 (m, 3H), 3.37-3.30 (m, 2H), 3.17-3.12 (m, 2H),3.07-3.05 (m, 2H), 2.58-2.50 (m, 1H), 2.54 (s, 3H), 1.93-1.88 (m, 2H),1.69-1.65 (m, 2H), 1.63-1.54 (m, 4H)

Preparation of Compound 141

Compound 141 was prepared in the same way as Compound 140, starting fromintermediate EB and intermediate I. The crude product was purified bypreparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 40 g, Grace, dry loading(silica), mobile phase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 70/30 to 10/90) togive 0.056 g of Compound 141 as a white solid (43%).

1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 8.65 (d, J=6.9 Hz, 1H), 8.08 (t, J=6.0Hz, 1H), 7.91 (d, J=9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.40-7.37 (m, 1H), 7.30 (d, J=8.2 Hz,2H), 7.21 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 7.14 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 6.97-6.95 (m, 1H),6.45 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 4.46 (d, J=5.7 Hz, 2H), 3.96 (s, 2H), 3.75 (s,2H), 3.41 (quin, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 2.60-2.55 (m, 2H), 2.57 (s, 3H),2.30-2.26 (m, 2H)

Preparation of Compound 142

Compound 142 was prepared in the same way as Compound 140, starting fromintermediate EB and intermediate Q. The crude product was purified bypreparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 40 g, Grace, dry loading(silica), mobile phase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 70/30 to 10/90) andyielding 0.165 g of Compound 142 as a white solid (62%).

1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 8.64 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 7.98 (t, J=5.8Hz, 1H), 7.88 (d, J=9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.39-7.35 (m, 1H), 7.19 (d, J=8.0 Hz,2H), 7.16 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 6.97-6.93 (m, 1H), 6.49 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H),6.43 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 4.37 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 4.00 (s, 4H), 3.95 (s,4H), 2.55 (s, 3H)

Preparation of Compound 143

Compound 143 was prepared in the same way as Compound 140, starting fromintermediate EB and intermediate CC. The crude product was purified bypreparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 40 g, Grace, dry loading(silica), mobile phase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 70/30 to 10/90) togive 0.252 g of Compound 143 as a white solid (74%).

1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 8.64 (d, J=6.6 Hz, 1H), 7.98 (br t,J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.87 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.39-7.35 (m, 1H), 7.17 (d, J=8.5Hz, 2H), 6.96-6.93 (m 1H), 6.37 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 5.01 (dquin, J=56,6.5 Hz, 1H), 4.35 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 3.76 (s, 2H), 3.74 (s, 2H),2.61-2.58 (m, 2H), 2.54 (s, 3H), 2.39-2.30 (m, 2H)

Synthesis of Compound 144 & Compound 145

Preparation of Compound 144

Compound 144 was prepared in the same way as Compound 138, starting fromintermediate DZ and intermediate Q. The crude product was purified bypreparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 40 g, Grace, dry loading(silica), mobile phase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 70/30 to 10/90) togive 0.128 g of Compound 144 as a white solid (51%).

1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 8.66 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 8.06 (t, J=5.8Hz, 1H), 7.84 (d, J=9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.38-7.34 (m, 1H), 7.19 (d, J=8.0 Hz,2H), 7.15 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 6.95-6.92 (m, 1H), 6.49 (d, J=9.1 Hz, 2H),6.43 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 2H), 4.37 (d, J=6.1 Hz, 2H), 4.00 (s, 4H), 3.95 (s,4H), 2.99 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.24 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

Preparation of Compound 145

Compound 144 (0.32 g, 0.56 mmol) was dissolved in ethanol (5 mL) andtreated with Pd/C 10% (0.064 g, 0.060 mmol). The reaction mixture wasstirred under 3 bar of H₂ at room temperature for 3 days, then filteredover a pad of Celite® and evaporated to dryness. The crude product waspurified by preparative LCs (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 24 g, Grace,liquid loading (DCM), mobile phase gradient Heptane/(EtOAc/MeOH) (9:1)from 90/0 to 20/80; then spherical C18, 25 μm, 40 g YMC-ODS-25, dryloading (Celite®), mobile phase gradient: from 50% (aq. NH₄HCO₃ 0.2%),50% MeCN to 100% MeCN then MeCN 100%) to give 0.184 g of Compound 145 asa white solid (56%).

1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 7.69 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.16 (d, J=8.2Hz, 2H), 7.12 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 2H), 6.49 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.41 (d, J=8.5Hz, 2H), 4.27 (d, J=5.7 Hz, 2H), 4.0 (s, 4H), 3.99-3.94 (m, 2H), 3.94(s, 4H), 2.85 (t, J=6.3 Hz, 2H), 2.67 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.94-1.88 (m,2H), 1.77-1.72 (m, 2H), 1.09 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 146 & Compound 147

Preparation of Intermediate EE

LiHMDS 1.5 M (2.64 mL, 3.96 mmol) was added dropwise to a stirredsolution of intermediate DY (0.721 g, 3.30 mmol) in THF (10 mL) at −70°C. under N₂. The reaction was stirred at −70° C. for 2 h, thenhexachloroethane (0.938 g, 3.96 mmol) in THF (2 mL) was added dropwise.The reaction was allowed to stir at room temperature for 4 h andquenched with water and saturated aqueous NH₄Cl. The aqueous phase wasextracted with EtOAc. The organic phase was dried over MgSO₄, filteredand evaporated to dryness to give 0.913 g of intermediate EE (quant.),used as such in the next step.

Preparation of Intermediate EF/EG

Sodium hydroxide 8M (2.05 mL, 16.4 mmol) was added to a solution ofintermediate EE (813 mg, 3.22 mmol) in THE (3.9 mL) and MeOH (3.9 mL),the resulting mixture was stirred at 70° C. overnight. HCl (1 M) wasadded to the mixture until pH 1. The resulting precipitate was filteredand dried under high vacuum at 50° C. to give 0.612 g of a mixture ofintermediate EF and EG, used as such in the next step.

Preparation of Compound 146 & Compound 147

Compounds 146 and 147 were prepared in the same way as Compound 138,starting from mixture of intermediate EF/EG and intermediate I. Thecrude products were purified by preparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40μm, 24 g, Grace, dry loading (silica), mobile phase gradientHeptane/EtOAc from 70/30 to 10/90) to give 0.128 g (61%) of Compound 146and 0.037 g (17%) of Compound 147, both as white solids.

Compound 146

1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 8.36 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.87 (d, J=8.6Hz, 1H), 7.42-7.38 (m, 1H), 7.31-7.26 (m, 3H), 7.21 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 2H),7.14 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.45 (d, J=9.1 Hz, 2H), 4.46 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H),3.96 (s, 2H), 3.75 (s, 2H), 3.43-3.38 (m, 1H), 3.04 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H),2.60-2.54 (m, 2H), 2.31-2.25 (m, 2H), 1.26 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 3H)

Compound 147

1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 8.14 (t, J=6.1 Hz, 1H), 7.47 (d, J=8.4Hz, 1H), 7.40-7.36 (m, 1H), 7.29 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.21 (d, J=8.0 Hz,2H), 7.14 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 2H), 6.46-6.44 (m, 3H), 4.44 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H),4.09 (s, 3H), 3.96 (s, 2H), 3.75 (s, 2H), 3.46-3.38 (m, 1H), 3.00 (q,J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.60-2.54 (m, 2H), 2.31-2.25 (m, 2H), 1.23 (t, J=7.6 Hz,3H)

Synthesis of Compound 148

Preparation of Intermediate EH

To a solution of tert-Butyl 6-oxo-2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane-2-carboxylate(CAS [1181816-12-5], 1 g, 4.73 mmol) in dry DCM (50 mL) at 0° C. wasadded DAST (1.86 mL, 14.2 mmol), then the mixture was warmed to roomtemperature and stirred for 16 h. Additional DAST (0.62 mL, 1 eq., 4.73mmol) was added, then the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3h. The mixture was quenched with sat. NaHCO₃, then stirred for 10 min.The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with DCM(2×). The combined organic layers were dried over MgSO₄, filtered offand evaporated to dryness to give 1.02 g of intermediate EH as a yellowsolid (76%).

Preparation of Intermediate EI

Accordingly, intermediate 83 was prepared in the same way asintermediate DJ starting from intermediate EH yielding 0.764 g as abeige solid

Preparation of Intermediate EJ

Accordingly, intermediate EJ was prepared in the same way asintermediate DK and 4-fluorobenzonitrile starting from intermediate EIyielding 0.608 g as a white solid, 74%

Preparation of Intermediate EK

Accordingly, intermediate EK was prepared in the same way asintermediate DL starting from intermediate EJ yielding 0.559 g as a bluesolid, 74%

Preparation of Compound 148

Compound 148 was prepared in the same way as Compound 117 (usingtriethylamine instead of DIPEA), starting from intermediate L andintermediate EK. The crude product was purified by preparative LC(irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 40 g, Grace, dry loading (Celite®), mobilephase gradient Heptane/(EtOAc/MeOH) (9:1) from 85/15 to 40/60) to give0.285 g of Compound 148 as a white solid (70%).

1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.38 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.67 (d, J=2.5Hz, 1H), 8.50 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.19 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 2H), 6.42 (d, J=8.2Hz, 2H), 4.41 (d, J=5.7 Hz, 2H), 3.85 (s, 4H), 2.99 (q, J=7.5 Hz, 2H),2.84 (t, J=12.6 Hz, 4H), 1.26 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 149

Preparation of Intermediate EL

iPrMgCl·LiCl 1.3 M (7.14 mL, 9.28 mmol) was added to a solution of2-fluoro-4-bromobenzonitrile in anhydrous THF (25 mL) at 0° C. under N₂.The resulting solution was stirred at 0° C. for 4 h under a stream ofN2, before being cannulated (ca. 30 min) to a solution of intermediate Rand N1,N1,N2,N2-tetramethylcyclohexane-1,2-diamine (CAS [38383-49-2],0.063 g, 0.37 mmol) and CoCl₂ (0.04 g, 0.31 mmol) in anhydrous THF (25mL) under N₂, at 0° C. The resulting mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 18 h, then quenched with water. EtOAc was added, theaqueous layer was separated and extracted with EtOAc (2×). The combinedorganic layers were washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered offand evaporated to dryness. The crude mixture was purified by preparativeLCs (regular SiOH, 30 μm, 80 g, Interchim, dry loading (Celite®), mobilephase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 95/5 to 60/40; then spherical C18, 25μm, 120 g YMC-ODS-25, dry loading (Celite®), mobile phase gradient: from20% (aq. NH₄HCO3 0.2%), 80% MeCN to 100% MeCN) to give 0.933-g ofintermediate EL as a white solid, 95%.

Preparation of Intermediate EM

Accordingly, intermediate EM was prepared in the same way asintermediate DJ starting from intermediate EL yielding 0.608 g as awhite solid, 74%

Preparation of Intermediate EN

Accordingly, intermediate EN was prepared in the same way asintermediate DW starting from intermediate EM and4-bromotrifluoromethoxybenzene, yielding 0.478 g as a white solid, 44%.

Preparation of Intermediate EO

Accordingly, intermediate EO was prepared in the same way asintermediate DL starting from intermediate EN yielding 0.18 g as a bluesolid, 89%

Preparation of Compound 149

Compound 149 was prepared in the same way as Compound 131, starting from6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[1,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid CAS[1216142-18-5], and intermediate EO. The crude product was purified bypreparative LCs (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 24 g, Grace, dry loading(Celite®), mobile phase gradient Heptane/(EtOAc/MeOH) (9:1) from 95/5 to50/50; then spherical C18, 25 μm, 40 g YMC-ODS-25, dry loading(Celite®), mobile phase gradient: from 50% (aq. NH₄HCO₃ 0.2%), 50% MeCNto 100% MeCN then 100% MeCN) to give 0.148 g of Compound 149 as a whitesolid (41%). 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.06 (d, J=1.6 Hz, 1H),8.46 (t, J=5.7 Hz, 1H), 7.67 (d, J=9.5 Hz, 1H), 7.46 (dd, J=9.5, 2.2 Hz,1H), 7.36 (t, J=7.9 Hz, 1H), 7.15-7.06 (m, 4H), 6.45 (d, J=7.8 Hz, 2H),4.54 (br d, J=5.7 Hz, 2H), 3.96 (s, 2H), 3.75 (s, 2H), 3.44 (quin, J=8.8Hz, 1H), 2.98 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.59-2.55 (m, 2H), 2.32-2.28 (m, 2H),1.26 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 150

Preparation of Intermediate EP

iPrMgCl·LiCl 1.3 M (10.5 mL, 13.7 mmol) was added to a solution of4-bromo-3-fluorobenzonitrile (1.39 g, 6.96 mmol) in anhydrous THF (8 mL)at 0° C. under N₂. The resulting solution was stirred at 0° C. for 4 hunder a stream of N₂. This solution was added dropwise over 1 h to asolution of intermediate R (0.75 g, 2.32 mmol), Fe(acac)₃ (0.082 g, 0.23mmol) and TMEDA (0.84 mL, 5.57 mmol) in anhydrous THF (15 mL) under N₂,at 0° C. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 h,then quenched with NH₄Cl. EtOAc and water were added, the aqueous layerwas separated and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers werewashed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to dryness.The crude mixture was purified by preparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40μm, 50 g, Merck, dry loading (Celite®), mobile phase gradientHeptane/EtOAc from 100/0 to 65/35) to give 0.391 g of intermediate EP asa yellow solid (53%).

Preparation of Intermediate EQ

Accordingly, intermediate EQ was prepared in the same way asintermediate EM starting from intermediate EP yielding 0.325 g as agreen gum, quant.

Preparation of Intermediate ER

Accordingly, intermediate ER was prepared in the same way asintermediate EN starting from intermediate EQ and4-bromotrifluoromethoxybenzene, yielding 0.385 g as a white solid, 81%.

Preparation of Intermediate ES

Accordingly, intermediate ES was prepared in the same way asintermediate EO starting from intermediate ER yielding 0.229 g as a greysolid, 59%

Preparation of Compound 150

Compound 150 was prepared in the same way as Compound 149, starting from6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[1,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid CAS[1216142-18-5] and intermediate ES. The crude product was purified bypreparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 24 g, Grace, dry loading(Celite®), mobile phase gradient Heptane/(EtOAc/MeOH) (9:1) from 95/5 to50/50) to give 0.289 g of Compound 150 as a white solid (84%).

1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.08 (s, 1H), 8.48 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H),7.67 (d, J=9.6 Hz, 1H), 7.46 (dd, J=9.6, 2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.33 (t, J=7.9 Hz,1H), 7.19-7.11 (m, 4H), 6.45 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 4.51 (br d, J=5.6 Hz,2H), 3.98 (s, 2H), 3.75 (s, 2H), 3.57 (quin, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 3.00 (q,J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.61-2.56 (m, 2H), 2.37-2.31 (m, 2H), 1.27 (t, J=7.6 Hz,3H)

Synthesis of Compound 151

Preparation of Intermediate ET

Accordingly, intermediate ET was prepared in the same way asintermediate DQ starting from intermediate G and1-Bromo-4-(Trifluoromethylthio)Benzene CAS [333-47-1] yielding 0.37 g asa reddish solid, 60%.

Preparation of Intermediate EU

Intermediate ET (0.32 g, 0.855 mmol) was added portionwise to asuspension of LiAlH₄ (0.04 g, 1.05 mmol) in dry Et₂O (8 mL) at 0° C.under N₂. The mixture was warmed to room temperature then refluxed for 3h, and evaporated to dryness. The residue was taken-up in MeOH andfiltered over a pad of Celite®. The cake was washed with MeOH and thefiltrate was evaporated to dryness to give 0.328 g of intermediate EU asa pale yellow solid (quant.).

Preparation of Compound 151

Compound 151 was prepared in the same way as Compound 150, starting from6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[1,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid CAS[1216142-18-5] and intermediate EU. The crude product was purified bypreparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 30 g, Merck, dry loading(Celite®), mobile phase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 90/10 to 10/90) togive 0.189 g of Compound 151 as a white solid (41%).

1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.08 (s, 1H), 8.47 (t, J=5.7 Hz, 1H),7.67 (d, J=9.5 Hz, 1H), 7.49-7.41 (m, 3H), 7.32 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 7.23(d, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 6.48 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 4.50 (br d, J=5.7 Hz, 2H),4.05 (s, 2H), 3.83 (s, 2H), 3.32 (quin, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 2.99 (q, J=7.6Hz, 2H), 2.66-2.62 (m, 2H), 2.33-2.27 (m, 2H), 1.27 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 152

Preparation of Intermediate EV

A solution of DIAD (0.74 mL, 3.75 mmol) in toluene (5 mL) was added to asolution of 6-oxo-2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane-2-carboxylate (CAS[1147557-97-8], 0.8 g, 3.75 mmol), 4-fluorophenol (0.421 g, 3.75 mmol)and triphenylphosphine (1.48 g, 5.63 mmol) in toluene (35 mL) at 0° C.under N₂. The reaction mixture was then allowed to warm up to roomtemperature slowly overnight. Additional 4-fluorophenol (0.21 g, 1.88mmol) was added and the reaction was stirred further at room temperaturefor 3 d. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness, then dissolvedin a minimum of diethyl ether and cooled to 0° C. A large excess ofheptane was added and the resulting mixture was evaporated under vacuumwhich induced the precipitation of PPh₃O, which was filtered off andwashed with diethyl ether. The filtrate was evaporated to dryness andpurified by preparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 40 g, Grace, dryloading (silica), mobile phase gradient: Heptane/EtOAc from 90/10 to50/50) to give 1.07 g of intermediate EV as a yellow solid (not obtainedpure but engaged as such in the next step).

Preparation of Intermediate EW

A solution of intermediate EV (0.945 g, 3.08 mmol) andchlorotrimethylsilane (1.95 mL, 15.4 mmol) in anhydrous methanol (31 ml)was stirred under N₂ overnight. The reaction mixture was then evaporatedto dryness and the residue triturated in Et₂O, filtered and dried togive 0.543 g of intermediate EW as beige solid (85%).

Preparation of Intermediate EX

A mixture of intermediate EW (0.393 g, 1.90 mmol), 4-bromobenzonitrile(0.518 g, 2.84 mmol) and sodium t-butoxide (0.729 g, 7.59 mmol) in1,4-dioxane (20 mL) was degassed under N₂. Then, palladium acetate(0.043 g, 0.190 mmol) and Xantphos (0.11 g, 0.190 mmol) were added, themixture was purged again with N₂ and heated to 120° C. overnight. Themixture was cooled to room temperature and filtered over a pad ofCelite®. The cake was washed with EtOAc and the filtrate was evaporatedto dryness. The crude product was purified by preparative LC (irregularSiOH, 15-40 μm, 80 g, Grace, dry loading (silica), mobile phase gradientHeptane/EtOAc from 90/10 to 50/50) to give 0.24 g of intermediate EX asyellow solid (41%).

Preparation of Intermediate EY

Accordingly, intermediate EY was prepared in the same way asintermediate ES starting from intermediate EX yielding 0.304 g as awhite solid, 97%

Preparation of Compound 152

Compound 152 was prepared in the same way as Compound 131 (heating 50°C.), starting from intermediate L and intermediate EY. The crude productwas purified by preparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 40 g Grace,dry loading (silica), mobile phase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 90/10 to10/90) to give 0.157 g of Compound 152 as a yellow solid (67%).

1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.38 (d, J=2.5 Hz, 1H), 8.67 (d, J=2.8Hz, 1H), 8.49 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.19 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.10 (t, J=8.8Hz, 2H), 6.86 (dd, J=9.1, 4.4 Hz, 2H), 6.39 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 2H), 4.63(quin, J=6.9 Hz, 1H), 4.40 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 3.84 (s, 2H), 3.76 (s,2H), 2.99 (q, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.75-2.72 (m, 2H), 2.26-2.22 (m, 2H), 1.26(t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 153

Preparation of Intermediate EZ

Silver triflate (4.79 g, 18.6 mmol), Selectfluor (3.30 g, 9.32 mmol),potassium fluoride (1.44 g, 24.9 mmol) and tert-Butyl2-hydroxy-7-azaspiro[3.5]nonane-7-carboxylate (CAS [240401-28-9], 1.50g, 6.22 mmol) were dissolved in ethyl acetate (33 mL). 2-fluoropyridine(1.60 mL) and trifluoromethyltrimethylsilane 2M (9.32 mL, 18.6 mmol)were added under N₂ and the resulting mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 40 h. The reaction mixture was then filtered overCelite® and evaporated to dryness. The crude mixture was purified bypreparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 120 g, Grace, dry loading(Silica), mobile phase gradient: from Heptane/EtOAc from 90/10 to 80/20)to give 0.855 g of intermediate EZ as white solid (44%).

Preparation of Intermediate FA

Intermediate EZ (0.853 g, 2.76 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (21 mL)and treated with HCl 3M in CPME (4.6 mL, 13.8 mmol) at 0° C. Thereaction was then stirred at room temperature overnight. The solvent wasremoved under reduced pressure to give 0.674 g of intermediate FA aswhite solid (99%).

Preparation of Intermediate FB

A suspension of intermediate FA (0.67 g, 3.21 mmol),4-fluorobenzonitrile (0.79 g, 6.45 mmol) and potassium carbonate (3.53g, 25.5 mmol) in DMSO (32 mL) was heated at 120° C. overnight. Thereaction was quenched with water and extracted with EtOAc (3×). Thecombined organic phases were washed with water (3×) and brine (2×),dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The crude productwas purified by preparative LC (irregular SiOH 15-40 μm, 40 g Grace, dryloading (silica), mobile phase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 90/10 to70/30) to give 0.747 g of intermediate FB as white solid (70%).

Preparation of Intermediate FC

Accordingly, intermediate FC was prepared in the same way asintermediate ES starting from intermediate FB yielding 0.241 g as awhite solid, 95%

Preparation of Compound 153

Compound 153 was prepared in the same way as Compound 152, starting fromintermediate L and intermediate 103. The crude product was purified bypreparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 40 g, Grace, dry loading(silica), mobile phase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 90/10 to 10/90) togive 0.222 g of Compound 153 as a yellow solid (59%).

1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.39 (d, J=2.8 Hz, 1H), 8.67 (d, J=2.5Hz, 1H), 8.50 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 7.21 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 6.90 (d, J=8.5Hz, 2H), 4.89 (quin, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 4.42 (d, J=5.7 Hz, 2H), 3.09-3.07(m, 2H), 3.04-3.02 (m, 2H), 3.00 (q, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.36-2.32 (m, 2H),1.98-1.94 (m, 2H), 1.66-1.64 (m, 4H), 1.27 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 154

Preparation of Intermediate FD

Accordingly, intermediate FD was prepared in the same way asintermediate ES starting from intermediate F yielding 1.29 g as a whitesolid, 81%

Preparation of Intermediate FE

To a solution of 6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[1,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylicacid (CAS [1216142-18-5], 0.117 g, 0.504 mmol) in DCM (5.1 mL) andtriethylamine (0.18 mL) were added EDCI (145 mg, 0.756 mmol) and HOBt(103 mg, 0.760 mmol) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for30 min. Intermediate FD (0.162 g, 0.536 mmol) was added and the mixturewas stirred at room temperature for 4 h. The mixture was washed withwater (2×). The organic layer was dried over MgSO₄, filtered andevaporated to dryness to give 0.293 g of intermediate FE as colourlessoil (quant.), used as such in the next step.

Preparation of Intermediate FF

To a solution of intermediate FE (0.291 g, 0.572 mmol) in methanol (5.9mL) was added trimethylchlorosilane (0.37 mL, 2.94 mmol) and the mixturewas stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The mixture was evaporated todryness to give 0.304 g of intermediate FF as a pale yellow foam(quant.).

Preparation of Compound 154

Trifluoromethanesulfonic anhydride (0.12 mL, 0.696 mmol) was added to asolution of intermediate FF (155 mg, 0.348 mmol) and DMAP (2.13 mg, 17.4μmol) in triethylamine (0.39 mL, 2.78 mmol) and DCM (5.3 mL) at 0° C.The resulting mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 6 h. Water was added andthe organic layer was washed with water, dried over MgSO₄, filtered andevaporated to dryness. The crude product was purified by preparative LC(irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 40 g, Grace, dry loading (silica), mobilephase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 90/10 to 10/90) to obtain 186 mg of apale yellow solid, which was triturated in heptane and purified bypreparative LC (spherical C18 25 μm, 40 g YMC-ODS-25, dry loading(Celite®), mobile phase gradient: 0.2% aq. NH₄HCO₃/MeCN from 90/10 to0/100) to give 0.112 g of Compound 154 as a white solid (59%).

1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.07 (s, 1H), 8.47 (br s, 1H), 7.67 (d,J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.46 (br d, J=9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.30 (br d, J=8.1 Hz, 2H),7.20 (br d, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 4.49 (br d, J=5.1 Hz, 2H), 4.41 (s, 2H), 4.18(s, 2H), 3.39-3.31 (m, 1H), 2.98 (q, J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.63-2.58 (m, 2H),2.34-2.29 (m, 2H), 1.26 (br t, J=7.3 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 155 & Compound 156

Preparation of Intermediate FG

Accordingly, intermediate FG was prepared in the same way asintermediate DK starting from 2-Thia-6-azaspiro[3.3]heptane 2,2-dioxideCAS [1263182-09-7] and 4-fluorobenzonitrile, yielding 0.206 g as a whitesolid, 51%

Preparation of Intermediate FH

Accordingly, intermediate FH was prepared in the same way asintermediate ES starting from intermediate FG yielding 0.208 g as awhite solid, 93%

Preparation of Compound 155

Compound 155 was prepared in the same way as Compound 153, starting from6-chloro-2-ethylimidazo[1,2-a]pyridine-3-carboxylic acid CAS[1216142-18-5] and intermediate FH. The crude product was purified bypreparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 24 g, Grace, dry loading(silica), mobile phase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 90/10 to 10/90) andyielding 0.252 g of Compound 155 as a white solid (69%).

1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 9.05 (s, 1H), 8.40 (br s, 1H), 7.66 (d,J=8.6 Hz, 1H), 7.45 (d, J=9.6 Hz, 1H), 7.21 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 2H), 6.46 (d,J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 4.47 (d, J=1.5 Hz, 4H), 4.41 (br s, 2H), 3.99 (s, 4H),2.96 (q, J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 1.25 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 3H)

Preparation of Compound 156

A solution of Compound 155 (0.117 g, 255 μmol) in methanol (5.6 mL) wasdegassed by N₂ bubbling for 5 min before the addition of Pd/C 10% (8.99mg, 8.44 μmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperatureunder 5 bar of H₂ overnight. The mixture was filtered through a pad ofCelite®, rinsed with EtOAc and evaporated to dryness. The crude productwas purified by preparative LC (Regular SiOH 15-40 μm, 24 g Grace, dryloading (silica), mobile phase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 70/30 to0/100 then MeOH 100%) to give 0.095 g of Compound 156 as white solid(69%).

1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 8.10 (br t, J=5.6 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (d,J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.44 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 2H), 4.46 (s, 4H), 4.29 (br d, J=6.1Hz, 2H), 3.98 (s, 4H), 3.97-3.94 (m, 2H), 2.71-2.68 (m, 2H), 2.58 (q,J=7.4 Hz, 2H), 1.83-1.78 (m, 4H), 1.08 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

Synthesis of Compound 157

Preparation of Intermediate FI

A solution of 2-amino-3-fluoropyridine (CAS [21717-95-3], 0.2 g, 1.78mmo) in Me-THF (9 mL) was cooled down to 5° C. Ethyl 3-oxovalerateethyl3-oxovalerate (0.50 mL, 3.53 mmol), iodobenzene diacetate (0.578 g, 1.79mmol) and boron trifluoride etherate (0.024 mL, 0.089 mmol) were addedsuccessively. The solution was stirred at the 5° C. for 2 h and thenwarmed to room temperature overnight. EtOAc and saturated aqueous NaHCO₃were added. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer wasextracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were dried over MgSO₄,filtered and evaporated to dryness. The crude mixture was purified bypreparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 120 g, Grace, liquid loading(DCM), mobile phase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 90/10 to 70/30) to give0.274 g of intermediate FI as white solid (65%).

Preparation of Intermediate FJ

To a solution of intermediate FI (0.172 g, 0.73 mmol) in water (2.4 mL)and ethanol (2.4 mL) was added sodium hydroxide (0.088 g, 2.19 mmol) andthe mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture wasacidified to pH 3 with HCl (3N). EtOH was evaporated and the residue wasbasified with KOH solution. The resulting white precipitate wascollected by filtration and acidified with HCl (1M) to pH 1 and thewhite solid was filtered and dried to give 0.119 g of intermediate FJ asa white solid (79%).

Preparation of Compound 157

Compound 157 was prepared in the same way as Compound 131, starting fromintermediate FJ and intermediate I. The crude product was purified bypreparative LC (irregular SiOH, 15-40 μm, 40 g, Grace, dry loading(silica), mobile phase gradient Heptane/EtOAc from 90/10 to 10/90) togive 0.091 g of JNJ-65053092-AAA as a white solid (42%).

1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 8.76 (d, J=6.9 Hz, 1H), 8.56 (br t,J=5.7 Hz, 1H), 7.32-7.27 (m, 3H), 7.22 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.14 (d, J=8.5Hz, 2H), 7.00-6.96 (m, 1H), 6.45 (d, J=9.1 Hz, 2H), 4.50 (d, J=6.0 Hz,2H), 3.96 (s, 2H), 3.75 (s, 2H), 3.45-3.38 (m, 1H), 2.99 (q, J=7.6 Hz,2H), 2.60-2.55 (m, 2H), 2.30-2.26 (m, 2H), 1.27 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H)

The following compounds were also prepared in accordance with theprocedures disclosed herein:

Characterising Data Table Melting LCMS Compound Point (Kofler UV MWBPM1/ LCMS No or DSC) Rt Area % exact BPM2 Method 1 3.21 97.9 506.2507.1 Method A 17 3.18 98.3 427.2 428.1 Method A 2 4.40 96.9 568.2 569.1Method A 3 4.88 99.3 569.2 570.1 Method A 23 3.39 94.2 450.2 451.2Method A 22 3.72 99.6 484.2 485.1 Method A 5 4.45 99.3 570.2 571.1Method A 9 4.08 97.0 485.2 486.1 Method A 7 3.96 100.0 568.2 569.1Method A 15 4.41 100.0 520.2 521.2 Method B 4 4.10 98.1 569.2 570.1Method A 12 25° C. to 3.33 98.7 394.2 395.4/ Method C 300° C./ 393.1 10°C.min/ 40 μl Al 25 3.69 95.0 620.2 621.2 Method A 6 3.64 99.4 539.3540.2 Method A 8 4.49 97.7 569.2 570.1 Method A 10 4.16 92.1 610.2 611.1Method A 18 5.10 99.1 412.2 413.1 Method A 24 3.96 96.3 526.2 527.1Method A 13 131.37° C./ 3.43 98.8 444.1 445/ Method C −58.88 J/g 442.925° C. to 350° C./ 10° C.min/ 40 μl Al 16 4.12 98.4 426.2 427.7 Method B26 3.52 100.0 619.2 620.2 Method A 19 2.52 99.6 396.2 397.1 Method A 112.52 97.1 486.2 487.1 Method A 409/ Method C 21 2.58 96.7 410.2 407 143.29 100.0 550.2 551.2 Method A 27 136° C. 2.47 92.7 396.2 397.1/ MethodC (Kofler) 395 28 2.44 95.5 485.2 486.1 Method A 29 4.45 98.2 534.2535.1 Method B 30 160° C. 2.38 99.4 368.1 369/ Method C (Kofler) 367 312.39 97.7 406.2 407.2 Method A

Further Characterising data

LCMS Compound Melting Point (Kofler UV Area MW BPM1/ LSMS No. or DS) Rt% (theor) BPM2 Method 28 3.78 96.6 597.2 598.1 METHOD D 14 3.29 100.0550.2 551.2 METHOD D 15 4.41 100.0 520.2 521.2 METHOD E 1 3.21 97.9506.2 507.1 METHOD D 7 3.96 100.0 568.2 569.1 METHOD D 29 4.45 98.2534.2 535.1 METHOD E 81 3.79 100.0 454.2 455.1 METHOD E 16 3.01 99.7426.2 427.1 METHOD D 4 184.57° C./−35.49 J/g 3.72 98.73 569.18 570.2/METHOD F 25° C. to 568.6 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al 24 3.96 96.3 526.2527.1 METHOD D 23 3.39 94.2 450.2 451.2 METHOD D 26 3.52 100.0 619.2620.2 METHOD D 22 3.72 99.6 484.2 485.1 METHOD D 2 4.40 96.9 568.2 569.1METHOD D 3 4.61 97.6 569.2 570.1 METHOD D 77 2.44 95.47 485.2 486.1METHOD D 4.49 97.71 569.2 570.1 METHOD D 9 4.08 97.02 485.2 486.1 METHODD 13 131.37° C./−58.88 J/g 3.43 98.8 444.1 445/ METHOD F 25° C. to 442.9350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al 12 see curve 25° C. to 3.33 98.7 394.2 395.4/METHOD F 300° C./10° C.min/40 Al 393.1 5 242.43° C./−52.69 J/g 25° C. to3.56 98.2 570.2 571.3/ METHOD F 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al 569.5 30 160°C. (Kofler) 2.11 98.2 368.1 369/ METHOD F 300° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al 36720 see curve 25° C. to 2.38 99.4 410.2 411.1/ METHOD F 350° C./10°C.min/40 μl Al 409.1 397.1/ 27 136° C. (Kofler) 2.47 92.7 396.2 395METHOD F 21 2.77 99.3 408.2 409.1 METHOD G 11 2.52 97.06 486.1 487.1METHOD D 18 5.1 99.14 412.2 413.1 METHOD H 4.16, 10 4.22 92.14, 610.2611.1, METHOD D 4.77 611.1 17 3.18 98.34 427.2 428.1 METHOD D 19 2.5299.61 396.2 397.1 METHOD D 6 3.64 99.4 539.3 540.2 METHOD D 31 2.39 97.7406.2 407.2 METHOD D 66 4.41 97.7 611.2 612.1 METHOD D 80 4.93 100.0582.2 583.1 METHOD D 32 3.48 99.5 506.2 507.1 METHOD D 79 4.86 98.7583.2 584.1 METHOD D 34 3.52 96.45 406.2 407.2 METHOD E 35 4.59 98.76510.2 511.2 METHOD D 68 180.57° C./−42.61 J/g 25° C/ to 3.62 99.3 555.2556.2/ METHOD F 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al 554.5 64 3.4 98.1 492.2 493.1METHOD D 39 4.27 98.46 519.2 520 METHOD D 40 3.72 97.68 447.2 448.1METHOD D 38 4.03 97.72 520.2 521.1 METHOD D 41 2.77 98.27 491.3 492.2METHOD D 70 3.53 99.43 554.3 555.2 METHOD D 43 4.02 99.14 535.0 535.1METHOD D 44 3.91 97.85 461.2 462.1 METHOD D 78 3.53 99.32 411.2 412.2METHOD E 48 3.03 99.74 476.2 477.2 METHOD D 49 2.93 97.41 486.2 487.2METHOD D 61 3 98.65 490.3 491.2 METHOD D 46 2.83 95.62 505.3 506.2METHOD D 47 3.71 95 549.2 550.2 METHOD D 51 3.67 98.3 549.6 550.1 METHODD 53 2.92 100.0 486.2 487.2 METHOD D 52 3.11 93.0 500.2 501.2 METHOD D65 3.95 96.8 538.3 539.2 METHOD D 69 3.79 98.8 553.3 554.2 METHOD D 333.43 98.0 447.2 448.1 METHOD D 63 5.51 95.4 507.2 508.1 METHOD H 60 3.55100.0 521.2 522.1 METHOD D 71 3.55 100.0 553.3 554.2 METHOD D 36 3.6299.5 548.2 549.2 METHOD D 37 4.35 98.4 509.2 510.2 METHOD D 42 4.28 99.9510.2 511.2 METHOD D 45 4.16 98.8 509.2 510.1 METHOD D 50 2.87 98.8500.2 501.2 METHOD D 54 3.70 99.1 507.2 508.1 METHOD D 55 2.90 99.2486.2 487.1 METHOD D 97 4.40 99.9 549.2 550.2 METHOD D 98 4.47 99.9549.2 550.2 METHOD D 99 2.85 100.0 486.2 487.2 METHOD D 100 5.57 100.0461.2 462.2 METHOD H 101 3.70 100.0 522.0 522.1 METHOD D 102 4.90 100.0549.2 550.2 METHOD D 103 4.97 100.0 549.2 550.2 METHOD D 104 3.61 99.4548.2 549.2 METHOD D 105 3.78 100.0 501.2 502.2 METHOD D 106 3.77 98.67487.2 488.1 METHOD D 107 3.75 100.0 501.2 502.2 METHOD D 108 3.80 98.6487.2 488.1 METHOD D 109 3.95 96.4 500.2 501.2 METHOD E 58 4.47 98.9570.2 571.1 METHOD D 67 4.39 98.9 554.2 555.1 METHOD D 110 5.61 99.0506.2 507.1 METHOD H 72 4.16 99.5 568.2 569.1 METHOD G 111 2.87 97.8500.2 501.2 METHOD G 73 3.61, 91.65, 569.2 570.1 METHOD I 3.68 7.33 745.43 99.9 553.3 554.2 METHOD H 112 3.74 98.9 548.2 549.2 METHOD G 1135.18 99.1 520.2 521.1 METHOD J 56 4.86 96.5 550.2 551.2 METHOD G 57 4.4796.8 551.2 552.1 METHOD G 59 3.67 95.3 502.2 503.1 METHOD G 114 5.4099.1 581.2 582.1 METHOD G 115 5.07 98.0 509.2 510.2 METHOD G 76 136.04°C./−55.97 J/g 3.88 96.9 583.2 584.3/ METHOD F 25° C. to 582.7 350°C./10° C.min/40 μl Al 75 183.86° C./−50.09 J/g 3.89 100.0 583.2 584.3/METHOD F 25° C. to 582.6 300° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al 92 80.75° C./−33.76J/g 3.16 100 504.2 505.1/ METHOD F 25° C. to 503.5 350° C./10° C.min/40μl Al 116 2.86 99.8 436.2 437.1 METHOD G 84 137.48° C./−87.44 J/g 3.06100.0 438.2 439.1/ METHOD F 25° C. to 437.4 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al87 190.35° C./−55.85 J/g 3.61 100.0 532.2 533.2/ METHOD F 25° C./ to531.6 250° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al 88 156.54° C./ −49.74 J/g 3.44 97.2533.2 534.2/ METHOD F 25° C. to 532.4 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al 86127.22° C./−63.46 J/g 2.85 96.4 439.2 440.1/ METHOD F 25° C. to 438.3350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al 83 108.84° C./−49.64 J/g 3.86 100.0 554.2555.2 METHOD F 25° C. to 613.6 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al [M + CH₃COO]—82 190.78° C./−58.34 J/g 539.4/ METHOD F 25° C. to 3.54 96.8 538.3 597.6350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al [M + CH₃COO]— 117 167.85° C./−87.32 J/g 3.48100.0 492.2 493.1/ METHOD F 25° C. to 491.4 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al89 192.86° C./−45.19 J/g 3.02 100.0 485.2 486.2/ METHOD F 25° C. to484.4 220° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al 85 147.41° C./−31.45 J/g 2.52 99.5408.3 409.2/ METHOD F 467.3 [M + CH₃COO]— 90 237.63° C./−116.22 J/g 2.30100.0 451.2 452.5/ METHOD K 25° C. to 450.2 300° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al91 204.21° C./−81.42 J/g 2.72 100.0 513.2 514.5/ METHOD K 25° C. to512.3 300° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al 93 182.04° C./−67.31 J/g 3.19 98.32486.2 487.5/ METHOD K 25° C. to 485.3 300° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al 118201.34° C./−67.10 J/g{circumflex over ( )}−1 2.39 94.45 398.1 399.4/METHOD K 25° C. to 397.2 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al 119 147.85°C./−51.51 J/g 3 100 485.2 486.4/ METHOD K 2.5° C. to 484.3 350° C./10°C.min/40 μl Al 120 139.57° C./−113.34 J/g 3.02 100 485.2 486.5/ METHOD K25° C. to 484.2 94 168.80° C./−55.36 J/g 3.61 99.27 485.2 486.1/ METHODF 25° C. to 484.3 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al 95 154.23° C./−78.85 J/g2.84 100 480.2 481.4/ METHOD K 25° C. to 497.2 350° C./10° C.min/40 μlAl 121 241.08° C./−75.05 J/g 2.65 96.76 487.2 488.1/ METHOD F 25° C. to486.3 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al 122 161.23° C./−54.16 J/g 2.92 96.6486.2 487.1/ METHOD F 25° C. to 485.4 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al 96182.82° C./−91.28 J/g 2.62 100 422.2 423.5/ METHOD K 25° C. to 421.2300° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al Cpd 123 166.63° C./−55.15 J/g, 2.58 97.1475.2 476.2/ METHOD F 25° C. to 474.3 300° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al (DSC:25° C. to 300° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 124 135.97° C./−75.64 J/g,3.02 100.0 491.2 492.4/ 25° C. to 490.3 METHOD K 300° C./10° C.min/40 μlAl (DSC: 25° C. to 300° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 125 146.77° C./−81.28J/g{circumflex over ( )}−1, 3.35 100.0 472.2 473.1/ METHOD F 25° C. to471.3 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al (DSC: 25° C. to 350° C./10° C.min/40 μlAl) Cpd 126 187.49° C./−68.56 J/g; 2.59 99.3 423.1 424/ METHOD F 289.39°C./+284.49 J/g 482.2 (DSC: 25° C. to [M + CH₃COO]— 300° C./10° C.min/40μl Al) Cpd 127 201.15° C./−111.61 J/g 3.39 98.7 436.2 437.1/ METHOD F(DSC: 25° C. to 495.3 300° C./10° C.min/40 μl [M + CH₃COO]— Al) Cpd 128160.59° C./−94.05 J/g 2.97 100.0 505.2 506.1/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to504.3 300° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 129 188.46° C./−42.53 J/g 2.6890.7 414.1 414.9/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to 413.1 350° C./10° C.min/40 μlAl) Cpd 158 101.95° C./−40.87 J/g 2.93 100.0 488.2 489.1/ METHOD F (DSC:25° C. to 487.4 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 152 see curve (DSC: 25°C. 3.41 98.5 519.2 520.1/ METHOD F to 518.4 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al)Cpd 148 158.14° C./−65.57 J/g 3 100.0 445.1 446/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C.to 444.3 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 133 84.29° C./−42.38J/g{circumflex over ( )}−1 3.18 100.0 473.2 474.1/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C.to 472.3 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 159 177.08° C./−85.31 J/g 3.76100.0 576.2 575.4/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to 577.2 350° C./10° C.min/40μl Al) Cpd 141 158.48° C./−115.36 J/g{circumflex over ( )}−1 3.64 98.9520.2 521.2/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to 579.5 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl [M +CH₃COO]— Al) Cpd 142 193.19° C./−79.28 J/g{circumflex over ( )}−1 3.4100.0 521.2 522.2/ (DSC: 25° C. to 580.5 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl [M +CH₃COO]— METHOD F Al) Cpd 131 172.76° C./−68.86 J/g 3.31 100.0 493.1494.1/ (DSC: 25° C. to 492.3 METHOD F 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd144 135.80° C./−64.11 J/g{circumflex over ( )}−1 3.51 97.8 535.2 536.2/METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to 594.5 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl [M + CH₃COO]— Al)Cpd 138 105.98° C./−50.26 J/g 3.75 98.5 534.2 535.2/ METHOD F (DSC: 25°C. to 593.5 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl [M + CH₃COO]— Al) Cpd 130 169.56°C./−68.85 J/g 2.91 100.0 462.2 463.5/ METHOD K (DSC: 25° C. to 521.3350° C./10° C.min/40 μl [M + CH₃COO]— Al) Cpd 134 188.07° C./−99.63 J/g2.89 100.0 486.2 487.2/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to 485.5 350° C./10°C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 160 166.29° C./−77.23 J/g 3.52 100.0 562.2 563.4/METHOD K (DSC: 25° C. to 621.4 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl [M + CH₃COO]— Al)Cpd 143 130.31° C./−83.46 Jg{circumflex over ( )}−1 2.73 97.9 378.2 379/METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to 437.3 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 153150.61° C./−64.88 J/g{circumflex over ( )}−1 3.5 98.7 521.2 522.2/METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to 520.5 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 161126.57° C./−47.92 J/g 3.61 100.0 534.2 535.5/ METHOD K (DSC: 25° C. to593.3 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl [M + CH₃COO]— Al) Cpd 162 238.06°C./−64.81 J/g 3.27 100.0 563.2 564.5/ METHOD K (DSC: 25° C. to 622.4350° C./10° C.min/40 μl [M + CH₃COO]— Al) Cpd 132 149.46° C./−64.76 J/g2.99 100.0 486.2 487.1/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to 485.4 350° C./10°C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 163 142.39° C./−61.91 J/g 3.37 100.0 408.2 409.4METHOD K (DSC: 25° C. to 407.4 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 149141.92° C./−60.55 J/g 3.98 100.0 586.2 587.4/ METHOD K (DSC: 25° C. to585.3 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 164 165.12° C./−58.86 J/g 3.52100.0 492.15 493.5/ METHOD K (DSC: 25° C. to 491.2 350° C./10° C.min/40μl Al) Cpd 157 144.55° C./−60.51 J/g{circumflex over ( )}−1 3.67 99.5552.2 553.5/ METHOD K (DSC: 25° C. to 551.4 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al)Cpd 139 135.21° C./−62.94 J/g{circumflex over ( )}−1 3.62 100.0 538.3539.5/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to 597.5 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl [M +CH₃COO]— Cpd 165 150.69° C./−73.99 J/g 3.4 100.0 458.2 459.2/ METHOD F(DSC: 25° C. to 457.3 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 150 144.49°C./−43.61 J/g 4.03 97.0 586.2 587.3/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to 585.4 350°C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 146 119.23° C./−38.89 J/g{circumflex over( )}−1 3.88 100.0 568.2 569.5/ METHOD K (DSC: 25° C. to 627.4 350°C./10° C.min/40 μl [M + CH₃COO]— Al) Cpd 147 151.74° C./−63.26J/g{circumflex over ( )}−1 3.66 100.0 564.2 565.4/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C.to 623.5 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl [M + CH₃COO]— Al) Cpd 140 121.52°C./−62.48 J/g 3.45 99.4 472.2 473.2/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to 531.6 350°C./10° C.min/40 μl [M + CH₃COO]— Al) Cpd 154 132.95° C./−79.92J/g{circumflex over ( )}−1 3.25 100.0 540.1 541.5/ METHOD K (DSC: 25° C.to 539.3 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 155 232.10° C./−88.86J/g{circumflex over ( )}−1 2.44 100.0 458.1 459.5/ METHOD K (DSC: 25° C.to 457.2 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 166 156.21° C./−30.90 J/g 5.22100.0 535.2 536.3/ METHOD F (DSC: 25'C to 594.4 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl[M + CH₃COO]— Al) Cpd 145 198.95° C./−102.61 J/g 3.42 100.0 539.3 540.4/METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to 598.7 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl [M + CH₃COO]— Al)Cpd 167 164.95° C./−78.44 J/g{circumflex over ( )}−1 3.66 98.0 538.3539.4/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to 597.6 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl [M +CH₃COO]— Al) Cpd 156 202.90° C./−47.56 J/g{circumflex over ( )}−1 2.13100.0 428.2 429.2/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to 427.4 350° C./10° C.min/40μl Al) Cpd 136 163.21° C./−60.16 J/g 3.05 99.4 475.16 476.2/ METHOD F(DSC: 25° C. to 474.4 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 151 164.83°C./−27.18 J/g 4.32 98.9 584.2 585.3/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to 583.5 350°C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 135 148.28° C./−63.15 J/g 3.22 98.8 474.16475.2/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to 473.4 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd137 201.30° C./−41.79 J/g 3.65 98.9 550.2 551.3/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C.to 549.5 350° C./10° C.min/40 μl Al) Cpd 168 183.37° C./−57.51 J/g 2.33100.0 424.2 425.1/ METHOD F (DSC: 25° C. to 423.1 350° C./10° C.min/40μl Al)

Analytical Methods

LCMS

The mass of some compounds was recorded with LCMS (liquid chromatographymass spectrometry). The methods used are described below.

General Procedure Method C

The High Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) measurement wasperformed using a LC pump, a diode-array (DAD) or a UV detector and acolumn as specified in the respective methods. If necessary, additionaldetectors were included (see table of methods below).

Flow from the column was brought to the Mass Spectrometer (MS) which wasconfigured with an atmospheric pressure ion source. It is within theknowledge of the skilled person to set the tune parameters (e.g.scanning range, dwell time, etc) in order to obtain ions allowing theidentification of the compound's nominal monoisotopic molecular weight(MW). Data acquisition was performed with appropriate software.

Compounds are described by their experimental retention times (R_(t))and ions. If not specified differently in the table of data, thereported molecular ion corresponds to the [M+H]⁺ (protonated molecule)and/or [M−H]⁻ (deprotonated molecule). In case the compound was notdirectly ionizable the type of adduct is specified (i.e. [M+NH₄]⁺,[M+HCOO]⁻, etc). For molecules with multiple isotopic patterns (Br, Cl .. . ), the reported value is the one obtained for the lowest isotopemass. All results were obtained with experimental uncertainties that arecommonly associated with the method used.

Hereinafter, “SQD” means Single Quadrupole Detector, “RT” roomtemperature, “BEH” bridged ethylsiloxane/silica hybrid, “HSS” HighStrength Silica, “DAD” Diode Array Detector.

TABLE LCMS Method codes (Flow expressed in mL/min; column temperature(T) in ° C.; Run time in minutes). Method Mobile Flow Run codeInstrument Column phase gradient Column T time Method Waters: AcquityWaters: BEH A: 95% 84.2% A for 0.343 6.2 C UPLC ®-DAD C18 (1.7 μm,CH₃COONH₄ 0.49 min, to 10.5% A 40 and Quattro 2.1 × 100 mm) 7 mM/5% in2.18 min, held for Micro ™ CH₃CN, B: 1.94 min, back to CH₃CN 84.2% A in0.73 min, held for 0.73 min.

General Procedure LCMS Methods A and B

The High Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) measurement wasperformed using a LC pump, a diode-array (DAD) or a UV detector and acolumn as specified in the respective methods. If necessary, additionaldetectors were included (see table of methods below).

Flow from the column was brought to the Mass Spectrometer (MS) which wasconfigured with an atmospheric pressure ion source. It is within theknowledge of the skilled person to set the tune parameters (e.g.scanning range, dwell time, etc) in order to obtain ions allowing theidentification of the compound's nominal monoisotopic molecular weight(MW). Data acquisition was performed with appropriate software.

Compounds are described by their experimental retention times (R_(t))and ions. If not specified differently in the table of data, thereported molecular ion corresponds to the [M+H]⁺ (protonated molecule)and/or [M−H]⁻ (deprotonated molecule). In case the compound was notdirectly ionizable the type of adduct is specified (i.e. [M+NH₄]⁺,[M+HCOO]⁻, etc). For molecules with multiple isotopic patterns (Br, Cl .. . ), the reported value is the one obtained for the lowest isotopemass. All results were obtained with experimental uncertainties that arecommonly associated with the method used.

Hereinafter, “MSD” Mass Selective Detector, “DAD” Diode Array Detector.

TABLE LCMS Method codes (Flow expressed in mL/min; column temperature(T) in ° C.; Run time in minutes). Method Mobile code Instrument Columnphase gradient Flow Run time Method Agilent: Agilent: A: 100% A for 0.810.5 B 1100/1200- TC-C18 CF₃COOH 1 min, to 40% A 50 DAD and (5 μm, 0.1%in in 4 min, MSD 2.1 × 50 mm) water, B: to 15% A in CF₃COOH 2.5 min,back to 0.05% in 100% A in 2 min. CH₃CN Method Agilent: Agilent: A: 90%A for 0.8 min, 0.8 10.5 A 1100/1200- TC-C18 CF₃COOH to 20% A in 50 DADand (5 μm, 0.1% in 3.7 min, held for MSD 2.1 × 50 mm) water, B: 3 min,back to 90% CF₃COOH A in 2 min. 0.05% in CH₃CN

When a compound is a mixture of isomers which give different peaks inthe LCMS method, only the retention time of the main component is givenin the LCMS table.

General Procedure

The High Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) measurement wasperformed using a LC pump, a diode-array (DAD) or a UV detector and acolumn as specified in the respective methods. If necessary, additionaldetectors were included (see table of methods below).

Flow from the column was brought to the Mass Spectrometer (MS) which wasconfigured with an atmospheric pressure ion source. It is within theknowledge of the skilled person to set the tune parameters (e.g.scanning range, dwell time . . . ) in order to obtain ions allowing theidentification of the compound's nominal monoisotopic molecular weight(MW). Data acquisition was performed with appropriate software.

Compounds are described by their experimental retention times (R_(t))and ions. If not specified differently in the table of data, thereported molecular ion corresponds to the [M+H]⁺ (protonated molecule)and/or [M−H]⁻ (deprotonated molecule). In case the compound was notdirectly ionizable the type of adduct is specified (i.e. [M+NH₄]⁺,[M+HCOO]⁻, etc. . . . ). For molecules with multiple isotopic patterns(Br, Cl . . . ), the reported value is the one obtained for the lowestisotope mass. All results were obtained with experimental uncertaintiesthat are commonly associated with the method used.

Hereinafter, “SQD” means Single Quadrupole Detector, “RT” roomtemperature, “BEH” bridged ethylsiloxane/silica hybrid, “HSS” HighStrength Silica, “DAD” Diode Array Detector.

TABLE LCMS Method codes (Flow expressed in mL/min; column temperature(T) in ° C.; Run time in minutes). Method Mobile Flow Run codeInstrument Column phase gradient Column T time Method Waters: Waters: A:95% 84.2% A for 0.343 6.2 F Acquity BEH C18 CH₃COONH₄ 0.49 min, to 10.5%A 40 UPLC ®-DAD (1.7 μm, 7 mM/5% in 2.18 min, held for and Quattro 2.1 ×100 CH₃CN, B: 1.94 min, back to Micro ™ mm) CH₃CN 84.2% A in 0.73 min,held for 0.73 min. Method Waters: Waters: A: 95% 84.2% A for 10.5% 0.3436.1 K Acquity ® BEH C18 CH₃COONH₄ A in 2.18 min, 40 H-Class- (1.7 μm, 7mM/5% held for 1.96 min, DAD and 2.1 × 100 CH₃CN, back to 84.2% A SQD2 ™mm) B: CH₃CN in 0.73 min, held for 0.73 min.

Hereinafter, “MSD” Mass Selective Detector, “DAD” Diode Array Detector.

TABLE LCMS Method codes (Flow expressed in mL/min; column temperature(T) in ° C.; Run time in minutes). Method Mobile Flow Run codeInstrument Column phase gradient Column T time Method E Agilent:Agilent: A: 100% A for 0.8 10.5 1100/1200- TC-C18 CF₃COOH 1 min, to 40%A 50 DAD and (5 μm, 0.1% in water, in 4 min, to 15% MSD 2.1 × 50 mm) B:A in 2.5 min, CF₃COOH back to 100% A 0.05% in in 2 min. CH₃CN 0.8 10.5Method D Agilent: Agilent: A: 90% A for 50 1100/1200- (5 μm, CF₃COOH 0.8min, to 20% DAD and 2.1 × 50 mm) 0.1% in water, A in 3.7 min, MSD B: for3 min, CF₃COOH back to 90% 0.05% in A in 2 min. CH₃CN Method H Agilent:Waters: A: NH₄OH 100% A for 0.8 10.5 1100/1200- XBridge ™ 0.05% in 1min, to 40% A 40 DAD and Shield RP18 water, B: in 4 min, held MSD (5 μm,CH₃CN for 2.5 min, back 2.1 × 50 mm) to 100% A in 2 min. Method GAgilent: Phenomene A: 90% A for 0.8 10 1200- x: Luna-C18 CF₃COOH 0.8min, to 20% 50 DAD and (5 μm, 2 × 50 mm) 0.1% in water, A in 3.7 min,MSD6110 B: held for 3 min, CF₃COOH back to 90% A 0.05% in in 2 min.CH₃CN Method I Agilent: Phenomene A: 70% A for 0.8 10 1200- x: Luna-C18CF₃COOH 0.8 min, to 10% 50 DAD and (5 μm, 2 × 50 mm) 0.1% in water, A in3.7 min, MSD6110 B: held for 3 min, CF₃COOH back to 70% A 0.05% in in 2min. CH₃CN Method J Agilent: Phenomene A: 100% A for 0.8 10 1200- x:Luna-C18 CF₃COOH 1 min, to 40% DAD and (5 μm, 2 × 50 mm) 0.1% in water,A in 4 min, to MSD6110 B: 15% A in CF₃COOH 2.5 min, 0.05% in back to100% A CH₃CN in 2 min.

Pharmacological Examples

MIC Determination for Testing Compounds Against M. tuberculosis.

Test 1

Appropriate solutions of experimental and reference compounds were madein 96 well plates with 7H9 medium. Samples of Mycobacterium tuberculosisstrain H37Rv were taken from cultures in logarithmic growth phase. Thesewere first diluted to obtain an optical density of 0.3 at 600 nmwavelength and then diluted 1/100, resulting in an inoculum ofapproximately 5×10 exp5 colony forming units per well. Plates wereincubated at 37° C. in plastic bags to prevent evaporation. After 7days, resazurin was added to all wells. Two days later, fluorescence wasmeasured on a Gemini EM Microplate Reader with 543 excitation and 590 nmemission wavelengths and MIC₅₀ and/or pIC₅₀ values (or the like, e.g.IC₅₀, IC₉₀, pIC₉₀, etc) were (or may be) calculated.

Test 2

Round-bottom, sterile 96-well plastic microtiter plates are filled with100 μl of Middlebrook (1×) 7H9 broth medium. Subsequently, an extra 100μl medium is added to column 2. Stock solutions (200×final testconcentration) of compounds are added in 2 μl volumes to a series ofduplicate wells in column 2 so as to allow evaluation of their effectson bacterial growth. Serial 2-fold dilutions are made directly in themicrotiter plates from column 2 to 11 using a multipipette. Pipette tipsare changed after every 3 dilutions to minimize pipetting errors withhigh hydrophobic compounds. Untreated control samples with (column 1)and without (column 12) inoculum are included in each microtiter plate.Approximately 10000 CFU per well of Mycobacterium tuberculosis (strainH37RV), in a volume of 100 μl in Middlebrook (1×) 7H9 broth medium, isadded to the rows A to H, except column 12. The same volume of brothmedium without inoculum is added to column 12 in row A to H. Thecultures are incubated at 37° C. for 7 days in a humidified atmosphere(incubator with open air valve and continuous ventilation). On day 7 thebacterial growth is checked visually.

The 90% minimal inhibitory concentration (MIC₉₀) is determined as theconcentration with no visual bacterial growth.

Test 3: Time Kill Assays

Bactericidal or bacteriostatic activity of the compounds can bedetermined in a time kill assay using the broth dilution method. In atime kill assay on Mycobacterium tuberculosis (strain H37RV), thestarting inoculum of M. tuberculosis is 10⁶ CFU/ml in Middlebrook (1×)7H9 broth. The antibacterial compounds are used at the concentration of0.1 to 10 times the MIC₉₀. Tubes receiving no antibacterial agentconstitute the culture growth control. The tubes containing themicroorganism and the test compounds are incubated at 37° C. After 0, 1,4, 7, 14 and 21 days of incubation samples are removed for determinationof viable counts by serial dilution (10⁻¹ to 10⁻⁶) in Middlebrook 7H9medium and plating (100 μl) on Middlebrook 7H11 agar. The plates areincubated at 37° C. for 21 days and the number of colonies aredetermined. Killing curves can be constructed by plotting the log₁₀ CFUper ml versus time. A bactericidal effect is commonly defined as 3-log₁₀decrease in number of CFU per ml as compared to untreated inoculum. Thepotential carryover effect of the drugs is removed by serial dilutionsand counting the colonies at highest dilution used for plating.

Test 4 (See Also Test 1 Above; in this Test a Different Strain ofMycobacterium tuberculosis Strain is Employed)

Appropriate solutions of experimental and reference compounds were madein 96 well plates with 7H9 medium. Samples of Mycobacterium tuberculosisstrain EH 4.0 (361.269) were taken from cultures in stationary growthphase. These were first diluted to obtain an optical density of 0.3 at600 nm wavelength and then diluted 1/100, resulting in an inoculum ofapproximately 5×10 exp5 colony forming units per well. Plates wereincubated at 37° C. in plastic bags to prevent evaporation. After 7days, resazurin was added to all wells. Two days later, fluorescence wasmeasured on a Gemini EM Microplate Reader with 543 nm excitation and 590nm emission wavelengths and MIC50 and/or pIC50 values (or the like, e.g.IC50, IC90, pIC90, etc) were (or may be) calculated. pIC₅₀ values may berecorded below in μg/mL.

Results

Compounds of the invention/examples, for example when tested in Test 1or Test 2 described above, may typically have an IC₉₀ value from 0.01 to10 μg/ml. Compounds of the invention/examples, for example when testedin Test 1 or Test 2 described above, may typically have a pIC₅₀ from 3to 10 (e.g. from 4.0 to 9.0, such as from 5.0 to 8.0) Compounds of theexamples were tested in Test 1 described above (in section“Pharmacological Examples”) and the following results were obtained:

Biological Data Table Compound No pIC50 pIC50 * pIC50 ** 1 8.03 7.88 177.82 6.5 6.33 2 7.79 7.83 7.93 3 7.59 7.58 7.59 23 7.32 7.35 7.35 227.26 7.18 7.24 5 7.16 7.13 7.13 9 7.08 7.14 7.27 7 7 7.12 7.1 15 6.997.02 4 6.92 12 6.89 7.15 6.97 25 6.87 6.88 6.96 6 6.85 6.99 6.89 8 6.836.73 6.77 10 6.83 6.85 6.97 18 6.72 6.91 6.9 24 6.7 6.56 6.94 13 6.576.59 6.58 16 6.55 6.61 26 6.17 6.16 6.23 19 6.1 5.94 5.97 11 5.73 5.525.92 21 5.61 5.98 5.86 14 5.55 5.53 27 5.39 5.38 5.54 28 5.22 5.12 5.1329 5.1 5.17 5.15 30 5.05 <4.9 4.96 31 <4.9 <4.9 <4.9 * and ** denoterepeated (2^(nd) and 3^(rd)) tests in the relevant assay; there may besome experimental deviation observed in the results

Further Biological Data

Compounds of the examples were tested in Test 4 described above (insection “Pharmacological Examples”) and the following results wereobtained:

Compound No pIC₅₀ 28 8.5 14 6.4 15 6.8 1 7.0 7 7.8 29 5.1 81 8.3 30 5.120 6.5 27 6.4 21 7.0 11 6.1 18 7.5 10 7.5 17 7.4 19 5.9 6 7.6 31 <4.9 668.1 80 <4.9 32 7.4 79 <4.9 34 <4.9 35 5.1 68 7.2 64 7.0 39 <4.9 40 <4.938 <4.9 41 5.1 70 6.5 43 <4.9 44 5.1 78 5.6 48 5.2 49 <4.9 61 6.2 46 5.147 5.2 121 5.6 122 6.1 96 6.9 124 7.1/7.2 123 5.8 125 8.7 158 6.4 1527.8 148 7.8 133 8.7 159 7.4 141 7.5 142 6.9 131 8.3 16 8.0 4 8.3 24 6.623 7.5 26 6.4 22 7.9 2 7.3 51 5.2 53 <4.9 52 5.1 65 8.0 69 7.5 33 <4.963 6.5 60 7.0 71 6.5 36 5.1 37 5.4 42 5.0 45 5.1 50 <4.9 54 5.1 55 <4.997 <4.9 98 <4.9 99 <4.9 100 <4.9 101 5.8 102 5.4 103 5.1 104 <4.9 105<4.9 106 <4.9 107 <4.9 108 <4.9 109 <4.9 58 7.0 67 8.0 110 <4.9 126  5/4.9 127 6.9/7.0 128 7.5 129 6.4/6.5 144 7.1 138 7.4 130 7.8 134 8.2160 7.5 143 6.4 153 8.7 161 5.6 162 5.1 132 5.1 3 8.3 77 6.1 8 7.3 9 7.913 7.5 12 7.5 5 7.5 72 8.0 111 <4.9 73 6.7 74 7.2 112 5.5 113 <4.9 568.2 57 8.1 59 6.5 114 4.9 115 5.5 76 7.6 75 7.8 92 6.6 116 6.5 84 7.0 876.6 88 6.6 86 6.8 83 7.0 82 7.2 117 7.7 89 5.2 85 6.0 90 4.9 91 5.0 936.9 118 4.9 119 6.2 120 5.0 94 7.1 95 6.8 163 5.1 149 8.7 164 5.1 1575.1 139 5.1 165 5.1 150 8.7 146 6.5 147 5.9 140 5.8

The invention claimed is:
 1. A compound of formula (IA) for use in thetreatment of tuberculosis

wherein R¹ represents C₁₋₆ alkyl or hydrogen; L¹ represents a linkergroup —C(R^(a))(R^(b))—; X¹ represents an aromatic linker group that isphenylene (which linker group may itself be optionally substituted byone or more substituents selected from fluoro, —OH, —OC₁₋₆ alkyl andC₁₋₆ alkyl, wherein the latter two alkyl moieties are themselvesoptionally substituted by one or more fluoro atoms); R^(a) and R^(b)independently represent hydrogen or C₁₋₆ alkyl (optionally substitutedby one or more fluoro atoms); X^(a) represents CH or N; X^(b) representsCH, N, O (in which case L² is not present) or C═O (in which case L² isalso not present); q¹ represents —CH₂—, —CH₂—CH₂—, —O—CH₂—, or “—”; q²represents —CH₂—, or —CH₂—CH₂—; q³ represents —CH₂—, or —CH₂—CH₂—; q⁴represents —CH₂—, or —CH₂—CH₂—; when X^(b) represents O or C═O, then L²is not present; when X^(b) represents C(R^(a)) or N, then L² mayrepresent hydrogen, halo, —OR^(f), —C(O)—R^(g), C₁₋₆ alkyl (optionallysubstituted by one or more halo), or an aromatic group (optionallysubstituted by one or more substituents selected from halo, C₁₋₆ alkyl(itself optionally substituted by one or more substituents selected fromfluoro, —CF₃ and/or —SF₅), —OC₁₋₆alkyl (itself optionally substituted byone or more fluoro atoms), —O-phenyl (itself optionally substituted byhalo, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆fluoroalkyl and/or —OC₁₋₆alkyl) or —SF₅); or, whenX^(b) is N, L² represents —S(O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl optionally substituted by oneor more fluoro atoms; R^(f) represents hydrogen, C₁₋₆ alkyl (optionallysubstituted by one or more fluoro) or an aromatic group (itselfoptionally substituted by one or more substituents selected from halo,C₁₋₆alkyl and —OC₁₋₆alkyl, where the latter two alkyl moieties maythemselves be optionally substituted by one or more fluoro atoms); R^(g)represents hydrogen or C₁₋₆alkyl (optionally substituted by one or moresubstituents selected from fluoro, or —OC₁₋₃ alkyl, which latter moietyis also optionally substituted by one or more fluoro atoms) or anaromatic group (optionally substituted by one or more substituentsselected from halo, C₁₋₆ alkyl or —OC₁₋₆alkyl); wherein the combinedring systems, i.e. Ring A and Ring B may be represented as follows:

either ring A and/or ring B may be optionally substituted by one or moresubstituents selected from: halo, C₁₋₆ alkyl (optionally substituted byone or more halo) and/or —OC₁₋₆alkyl (itself optionally substituted byone or more fluoro atoms), or a pharmaceutically-acceptable saltthereof.
 2. The compound of claim 1 in which such linker group X¹ issubstituted by one or more substituents selected from fluoro, CH₃, CF₃,—OCH₃ and —OCF₃.
 3. The compound of claim 1, wherein the spiro-cyclicmoiety, i.e. the combined X^(a) and X^(b)-containing ring may berepresented as follows:


4. The compound of claim 1, wherein X^(b) is N and wherein L² represents—S(O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl group optionally substituted by one or more fluoroatoms.
 5. The compound of claim 4, wherein L² represents —S(O)₂CF₃. 6.The compound of formula (IA) as defined in claim 1 wherein: L¹represents —CH₂—; X¹ represents phenylene and at least one of X^(a) andX^(b) represents N and the other represents CH, N or (in the case ofX^(b)) O; optional substituents on ring A and ring B are halo, C₁₋₃alkyl and —OC₁₋₃ alkyl, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof.7. A compound of formula (IB) as depicted below:

wherein the integers are as hereinbefore defined in claim 1, and where:n1, n2, n3 and n4 independently represent 1; and at least one of X^(a)and X^(b) represents N and the other represents CH or N.
 8. Apharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amountof a compound as defined in claim 1 and a pharmaceutically acceptablecarrier.
 9. A method for inhibiting Mycobacterium tuberculosis, whichmethod comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of acompound according to claim 1 to a subject in need thereof.
 10. Aproduct containing (a) a compound according to claim 1, and (b) one ormore other antibacterial agents, as a combined preparation forsimultaneous, separate or sequential use in the inhibition ofMycobacterum tuberculosis.
 11. The method of claim 9, further comprisingadministering one or more other antibacterial agents.
 12. The method ofclaim 11, wherein the one or more other antibacterial agents areselected from rifampicin, isoniazid, pyrazinamide, amikacin,ethionamide, ethambutol, streptomycin, para-aminosalicylic acid,cycloserine, capreomycin, kanamycin, thioacetazone, PA-824, delamanid,moxifloxacin, gatifloxacin, ofloxacin, ciprofloxacin, sparfloxacin,clarithromycin, amoxycillin with clavulanic acid, rifamycins, rifabutin,rifapentine, or a combination thereof.
 13. The method of claim 11,wherein the one or more other antibacterial agents and the compound ofclaim 1 are administered simultaneously.
 14. The method of claim 11,wherein the one or more other antibacterial agents and the compound ofclaim 1 are administered separately.
 15. The method of claim 11, whereinthe one or more other antibacterial agents and the compound of claim 1are administered sequentially.
 16. The product of claim 10, wherein thethe one or more other antibacterial agents are selected from rifampicin,isoniazid, pyrazinamide, amikacin, ethionamide, ethambutol,streptomycin, para -aminosalicylic acid, cycloserine, capreomycin,kanamycin, thioacetazone, PA-824, delamanid, moxifloxacin, gatifloxacin,ofloxacin, ciprofloxacin, sparfloxacin, clarithromycin, amoxycillin withclavulanic acid, rifamycins, rifabutin, rifapentine, or a combinationthereof.
 17. The product of claim 10, wherein the weight ratio of thecompound of claim 1 to the one or more other antibacterial agents rangefrom 1/10 to 10/1.
 18. The compound intermediate FE: